Administrator Guide

SIP Phone

Model No. KX-HDV430

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted unless necessary.

Document Version 2016-05

Introduction

Introduction
Outline
This Administrator Guide provides detailed information on the configuration and management of this unit.

Audience
This Administrator Guide contains explanations about the installation, maintenance, and management of the
unit and is aimed at network administrators and phone system dealers.
Technical descriptions are included in this guide. Prior knowledge of networking and VoIP (Voice over
Internet Protocol) is required.

Related Documentation
Quick Start Guide
Briefly describes basic information about the installation of the unit.
Operating Instructions
Describes information about the installation and operation of the unit.

Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://www.panasonic.net/pcc/support/sipphone/

Technical Support
When technical support is required, contact your phone system dealer/service provider.

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Excel, Internet Explorer, Outlook, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
• Google Chrome is a registered trademark of Google Inc.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

NOTES
• The screen shots shown in this guide are provided for reference only, and may differ from the screens
displayed on your PC.

2 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Initial Setup ............................................................................................. 9
1.1 Setup .............................................................................................................................. 10
1.1.1 Factory Defaults ........................................................................................................... 10
1.1.2 Language Selection for the Unit ................................................................................... 10
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup .................................................................................................... 10
1.1.4 Overview of Programming ............................................................................................ 13
1.1.5 Phone User Interface Programming ............................................................................. 14
1.1.5.1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming .............................. 14
1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming ................................................................................ 14
1.1.6.1 Password for Web User Interface Programming ....................................................... 15
1.1.6.2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming ................................. 15
1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface ................................................................. 16
1.1.6.4 Accessing the Web User Interface ............................................................................ 18
1.2 Firmware Update ........................................................................................................... 21
1.2.1 Firmware Update .......................................................................................................... 21
2 General Information on Provisioning ................................................. 23
2.1 Pre-provisioning ............................................................................................................ 24
2.1.1 What is Pre-provisioning? ............................................................................................. 24
2.1.2 How to Obtain a Pre-provisioning Server Address ....................................................... 24
2.1.3 Server Address Formats ............................................................................................... 24
2.1.4 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address via SIP PnP ................................................. 25
2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options .................................... 26
2.2 Provisioning ................................................................................................................... 30
2.2.1 What is Provisioning? ................................................................................................... 30
2.2.2 Protocols for Provisioning ............................................................................................. 30
2.2.3 Configuration File ......................................................................................................... 30
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files .................................................................................. 31
2.2.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example ........................................................................... 36
2.2.6 Encryption ..................................................................................................................... 37
2.3 Priority of Setting Methods .......................................................................................... 38
2.4 Configuration File Specifications ................................................................................ 39
2.5 Configuration File Examples ........................................................................................ 41
2.5.1 Examples of Codec Settings ........................................................................................ 41
2.5.2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions ............................................................................ 42
3 Phone User Interface Programming ................................................... 43
3.1 Phone User Interface Programming ............................................................................ 44
3.1.1 Opening/Closing the Web Port ..................................................................................... 44
4 Web User Interface Programming ....................................................... 45
4.1 Web User Interface Setting List ................................................................................... 46
4.2 Status ............................................................................................................................. 57
4.2.1 Version Information ....................................................................................................... 57
4.2.1.1 Version Information .................................................................................................... 58
4.2.2 Network Status ............................................................................................................. 58
4.2.2.1 Network Common ...................................................................................................... 59
4.2.2.2 IPv4 ............................................................................................................................ 59
4.2.2.3 IPv6 ............................................................................................................................ 60
4.2.2.4 VLAN ......................................................................................................................... 61
4.2.3 VoIP Status ................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.3.1 VoIP Status ................................................................................................................ 62

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 3

Table of Contents

4.3 Network .......................................................................................................................... 63

4.3.1 Basic Network Settings ................................................................................................. 63
4.3.1.1 IP Addressing Mode .................................................................................................. 64
4.3.1.2 IPv4 ............................................................................................................................ 64
4.3.1.3 IPv6 ............................................................................................................................ 66
4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings .................................................................................................. 67
4.3.2.1 Link Speed/Duplex Mode ........................................................................................... 68
4.3.2.2 LLDP .......................................................................................................................... 69
4.3.2.3 VLAN ......................................................................................................................... 70
4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings .................................................................................................... 71
4.3.3.1 HTTP Client ............................................................................................................... 71
4.3.3.2 Proxy Server .............................................................................................................. 72
4.3.4 STUN Settings .............................................................................................................. 73
4.3.4.1 STUN ......................................................................................................................... 73
4.3.5 Multicast Paging Settings ............................................................................................. 74
4.3.5.1 Multicast Paging ........................................................................................................ 74
4.3.6 LDAP Settings .............................................................................................................. 75
4.3.6.1 LDAP ......................................................................................................................... 76
4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings ............................................................................................. 78
4.3.7.1 Xtended Service ........................................................................................................ 78
4.3.7.2 Xtended Service Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16] .............................................................. 79
4.3.8 UC Settings .................................................................................................................. 81
4.3.8.1 Presence Feature ...................................................................................................... 81
4.3.9 XML Application Settings .............................................................................................. 82
4.3.9.1 XML Application ......................................................................................................... 83
4.3.9.2 XML Phonebook ........................................................................................................ 85
4.3.10 ACD Settings [Line1]–[Line16] ..................................................................................... 86
4.3.11 Call Center Settings [Line1]–[Line16] ........................................................................... 87
4.4 System ............................................................................................................................ 88
4.4.1 Language Settings ........................................................................................................ 89
4.4.1.1 Selectable Language ................................................................................................. 89
4.4.1.2 Language Settings ..................................................................................................... 91
4.4.2 User Password Settings ............................................................................................... 92
4.4.2.1 User Password .......................................................................................................... 92
4.4.3 Admin Password Settings ............................................................................................. 93
4.4.3.1 Admin Password ........................................................................................................ 93
4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings ..................................................................................................... 94
4.4.4.1 Synchronization (Synchronisation) ............................................................................ 94
4.4.4.2 Time Zone .................................................................................................................. 95
4.4.4.3 Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) ....................................................................... 95
4.4.4.4 Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer Time) .......................... 95
4.4.4.5 End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer Time) ............................ 97
4.4.5 Advanced Settings ........................................................................................................ 98
4.4.5.1 IP Phone .................................................................................................................... 98
4.4.6 Import Display File ........................................................................................................ 99
4.4.6.1 Import Display File ..................................................................................................... 99
4.4.7 Wait Time ...................................................................................................................... 99
4.4.7.1 Wait Time ................................................................................................................. 100
4.4.8 Communication Camera ............................................................................................. 100
4.4.8.1 Communication Camera Settings [No. 1]–[No. 16] .................................................. 101
4.5 VoIP ............................................................................................................................... 101
4.5.1 SIP Settings ................................................................................................................ 101
4.5.1.1 User Agent ............................................................................................................... 102
4.5.1.2 NAT Identity ............................................................................................................. 102
4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16] ................................................................................... 103

4 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Table of Contents

4.5.2.1 Basic ........................................................................................................................ 103

4.5.2.2 Advanced ................................................................................................................. 105
4.5.3 VoIP Settings .............................................................................................................. 110
4.5.3.1 RTP .......................................................................................................................... 111
4.5.3.2 Voice Quality Report ................................................................................................ 111
4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16] .................................................................................. 113
4.5.4.1 Basic ........................................................................................................................ 114
4.5.4.2 Advanced ................................................................................................................. 116
4.6 Telephone ..................................................................................................................... 118
4.6.1 Call Control ................................................................................................................. 118
4.6.1.1 Call Control .............................................................................................................. 118
4.6.1.2 Emergency Call Phone Numbers ............................................................................ 121
4.6.1.3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers ................................................................................ 121
4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16] .................................................................................... 122
4.6.2.1 Call Features ........................................................................................................... 122
4.6.2.2 Dial Plan .................................................................................................................. 126
4.6.3 Hotline Settings .......................................................................................................... 127
4.6.3.1 Hotline ...................................................................................................................... 127
4.6.4 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) ................................................................................ 128
4.6.4.1 Flexible Key Settings ............................................................................................... 129
4.6.5 Tone Settings .............................................................................................................. 130
4.6.5.1 Dial Tone .................................................................................................................. 131
4.6.5.2 Busy Tone ................................................................................................................ 132
4.6.5.3 Ringing Tone ............................................................................................................ 133
4.6.5.4 Stutter Tone ............................................................................................................. 133
4.6.5.5 Reorder Tone ........................................................................................................... 134
4.6.6 Import Phonebook ...................................................................................................... 135
4.6.6.1 Import Phonebook ................................................................................................... 136
4.6.7 Export Phonebook ...................................................................................................... 136
4.6.7.1 Export Phonebook ................................................................................................... 137
4.6.8 Video Call Settings ..................................................................................................... 137
4.6.8.1 Default Call Mode .................................................................................................... 138
4.6.8.2 Screen Mode ........................................................................................................... 139
4.6.8.3 Send Image ............................................................................................................. 139
4.6.8.4 Rate Settings ........................................................................................................... 139
4.6.9 DSS Console .............................................................................................................. 140
4.6.9.1 DSS 1-5 Key (No. 1–200) ........................................................................................ 141
4.7 Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 142
4.7.1 Provisioning Maintenance .......................................................................................... 143
4.7.1.1 Provisioning Maintenance ........................................................................................ 143
4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance ............................................................................................... 145
4.7.2.1 Firmware Maintenance ............................................................................................ 145
4.7.3 Export Logging File ..................................................................................................... 146
4.7.3.1 Export Logging File .................................................................................................. 146
4.7.4 Reset to Defaults ........................................................................................................ 147
4.7.5 Restart ........................................................................................................................ 147
5 Configuration File Programming ...................................................... 149
5.1 Configuration File Parameter List .............................................................................. 150
5.2 General Information on the Configuration Files ....................................................... 168
5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters .................................................................................... 168
5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values ....................................................................... 169
5.3 System Settings .......................................................................................................... 170
5.3.1 System Settings .......................................................................................................... 170
5.3.2 Basic Network Settings ............................................................................................... 172

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 5

Table of Contents

5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings ................................................................................................ 176

5.3.4 Pre-Provisioning Settings ........................................................................................... 179
5.3.5 Provisioning Settings .................................................................................................. 180
5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings .......................................................................................... 185
5.3.7 HTTP Settings ............................................................................................................ 187
5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings ................................................................................................ 189
5.3.9 TR-069 Settings .......................................................................................................... 191
5.3.10 XML Settings .............................................................................................................. 195
5.3.11 XSI Settings ................................................................................................................ 200
5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings .......................................................................................... 205
5.3.13 LDAP Settings ............................................................................................................ 207
5.3.14 Call Center Settings .................................................................................................... 211
5.3.15 SNMP Settings ........................................................................................................... 214
5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings ........................................................................................... 215
5.3.17 NTP Settings .............................................................................................................. 218
5.3.18 Time Settings .............................................................................................................. 218
5.3.19 Network Phonebook (Common) ................................................................................. 224
5.3.20 Language Settings ...................................................................................................... 224
5.3.21 NAT Settings ............................................................................................................... 226
5.3.22 SIP Settings ................................................................................................................ 228
5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings ........................................................................................................ 251
5.3.24 CODEC Settings ......................................................................................................... 253
5.3.25 DTMF Settings ............................................................................................................ 254
5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings ................................................................................... 256
5.3.27 SRTP Settings ............................................................................................................ 259
5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH ............................................................................................. 261
5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings ........................................................................................................ 263
5.3.30 Telephone Settings ..................................................................................................... 265
5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings .................................................................................................. 271
5.3.32 DSS Key Settings ....................................................................................................... 273
5.3.33 Tone Settings .............................................................................................................. 274
5.3.34 Call Control Settings ................................................................................................... 284
5.3.35 Video Communication Settings .................................................................................. 294
5.3.36 Network Camera Settings ........................................................................................... 296
5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings ............................................................................... 299
5.3.38 Logging Settings ......................................................................................................... 302
6 Useful Telephone Functions .............................................................. 305
6.1 Phonebook Import and Export ................................................................................... 306
6.1.1 Import/Export Operation ............................................................................................. 308
6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel ........................................................................................ 309
6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook ....................................................................... 311
6.2 Dial Plan ....................................................................................................................... 312
6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings ....................................................................................................... 312
6.3 Flexible Keys ............................................................................................................... 315
6.3.1 Settings using Web User Interface Programming ...................................................... 318
6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming ......................................................... 319
6.4 Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface) ............................................................. 321
6.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................ 321
6.4.2 XSI Service Settings ................................................................................................... 322
6.5 BroadCloud (Presence) .............................................................................................. 323
6.5.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................ 323
6.5.2 BroadCloud (Presence) Function Settings ................................................................. 324
7 Firmware Update ................................................................................ 325

6 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Table of Contents

7.1 Firmware Server Setup ............................................................................................... 326

7.2 Firmware Update Settings .......................................................................................... 326
7.3 Executing Firmware Update ....................................................................................... 326
8 Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 329
8.1 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 330

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 7

Table of Contents

8 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 1
Initial Setup

This section provides an overview of the setup

procedures for the unit.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 9

1.1 Setup

1.1 Setup
1.1.1 Factory Defaults
Many of the settings for this unit have been configured before the unit ships.
Where possible, these settings are configured with the optimum or most common values for the setting. For
example, the port number of the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) server is set to "5060".
However, many of the settings, such as the address of the SIP server or the phone number, have not been
pre-configured, and they must be modified depending on the usage environment. If the port number of the
SIP server is not "5060", the value of this setting must be changed.
This unit thus will not function properly using only the factory default settings. The settings for each feature
must be configured according to the environment in which the unit is used.

Note
• If you are using a PoE hub, the number of devices that you can connect simultaneously is limited by
the amount of power supplied by the hub.

1.1.2 Language Selection for the Unit

You can change the language used on the LCD.
In addition, various settings can be configured by accessing the Web user interface from a PC on the same
network (→ see 4 Web User Interface Programming). You can select the language for the Web user
interface.

Note
• To select the display language for the unit, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web
site (→ see Introduction).
• To select the display language for the Web user interface, see 4.4.1 Language Settings.

1.1.3 Basic Network Setup

This section describes the basic network settings that you must configure before you can use the unit on
your network.
You must configure the following network settings:
• IP Address Mode (IPv4 or IPv6 or IPv4/IPv6 Dual) settings
• TCP/IP settings (DHCP / RA for IPv6 / static IP)
• DNS server settings
For details about basic network settings via the Web user interface, see 4.3.1 Basic Network Settings.

TCP/IP Settings for IPv4 (DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment)

A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network. How you
assign an IP address depends on your network environment. This unit supports the following 2 methods for
assigning an IP address:

Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server

You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server
running on your network. With this method, the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP
addresses. Note that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up.
For details about the DHCP server, consult your network administrator.

10 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 1.1.3 Basic Network Setup

Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator

If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator, you will need to
manually configure settings such as the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.

TCP/IP Settings for IPv6 (DHCP, RA or Static IP Address Assignment)

A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network. How you
assign an IP address depends on your network environment. This unit supports the following 3 methods for
assigning an IP address:

Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server

You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server
running on your network. With this method, the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP
addresses. Note that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up.
For details about the DHCP server, consult your network administrator.

Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator

If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator, you will need to
manually configure settings such as the IP address, Prefix, default gateway, and DNS servers.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.

Using a RA (Router Advertisement)

An IPv6 address can be assigned using Stateless Autoconfiguration. This enables the setting of addresses
for only the router and the node without the need to manage information.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.

DNS Server Settings

You can configure the unit to use 2 DNS servers: a primary DNS server is DNS1 and a secondary DNS
server is DNS2. The primary DNS1 server receives priority over the secondary DNS2 server. If the primary
DNS1 server returns no reply, the secondary DNS2 server will be used.
For details about configuring the DNS server settings using the unit, or using the Web user interface, see
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit in this section.

DNS Priority Using Configuration File

The setting for DNS server(s) may be configured using the configuration files by your phone system dealer/
service provider (→ see "DHCP_DNS_ENABLE", "DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6",
"USER_DNS1_ADDR"/"USER_DNS2_ADDR" (for IPv4) and
"USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6"/"USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6" (for IPv6) in 5.3.2 Basic Network Settings).
• When "DHCP_DNS_ENABLE" (for IPv4) is set to "Y", you can manually configure the DNS server address
by using "USER_DNS1_ADDR" or ("USER_DNS1_ADDR" and "USER_DNS2_ADDR"). When set to "N", the
DNS server address will be automatically transmitted. This setting is available only when
("IP_ADDR_MODE"="0" or "IP_ADDR_MODE"="2") and "CONNECTION_TYPE"="1".
• When "DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6" (for IPv6) is set to "Y", you can manually configure the DNS server
address by using "USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6" or ("USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6" and
"USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6"). When set to "N", the DNS server address will be automatically transmitted.
This setting is available only when ("IP_ADDR_MODE"="1" or "IP_ADDR_MODE"="2") and
"CONNECTION_TYPE_IPV6"="1".

Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit

The following procedures explain how to change the network settings via the unit.
For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the unit, refer to the Operating
Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction).

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 11

1.1.3 Basic Network Setup

For details about configuring network settings via the Web user interface, see 4.3.1 Basic Network
Settings.
To configure IP Mode (IPv4, IPv6, IPv4&IPv6)
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Network Settings".
4. Tap or to select "IP Mode Select".
5. Tap "IP Mode Select".
6. Tap "IPv4"/"IPv6"/"IPv4&IPv6".
• The initial value is "IPv4".

Configuring the Network Settings Using IPv4

To configure network settings automatically
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Network Settings".
4. Tap or to select "IPv4 Settings".
5. Tap or to select "Connection Mode".
6. Select "DHCP", and then tap "OK"
7. Tap or to select "DNS".
8. Select "Auto", and then tap "OK".
• Select "Manual" to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually, and then tap "OK".
To configure network settings manually
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Network Settings".
4. Tap or to select "IPv4 Settings".
5. Tap or to select "Connection Mode".
6. Select "Static", and then tap "OK"
7. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if necessary,
DNS2 (secondary DNS server), and then tap "OK".

Configuring the Network Settings Using IPv6

To configure network settings automatically using DHCP
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Network Settings".

12 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 1.1.4 Overview of Programming

4. Tap or to select "IPv6 Settings".

5. Tap or to select "Connection Mode".
6. Select "DHCP", and then tap "OK"
7. Tap or to select "DNS".
8. Select "Auto", and then tap "OK".
• Select "Manual" to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually, and then tap "OK".
To configure network settings automatically using RA
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Network Settings".
4. Tap or to select "IPv6 Settings".
5. Tap or to select "Connection Mode".
6. Select "RA", and then tap "OK"
7. Enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server)
manually, and then tap "OK".
To configure network settings manually
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Network Settings".
4. Tap or to select "IPv6 Settings".
5. Tap or to select "Connection Mode".
6. Select "Static", and then tap "OK"
7. Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if necessary,
DNS2 (secondary DNS server), and then tap "OK".

Note
• If your phone system dealer/service provider does not allow you these settings, you cannot change
them even though the unit shows the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer/service
provider for further information.
• If you select "DHCP" for the connection mode, all the settings concerning static connection will be
ignored, even if they have been specified.
• If you select "DHCP" for the connection mode and "Auto" for DNS, the DNS server settings (DNS1
and DNS2) will be ignored, even if they have been specified.

1.1.4 Overview of Programming

There are 3 types of programming, as shown in the table below:

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 13

1.1.5 Phone User Interface Programming

Programming
Description References
Type
Phone user Configuring the unit’s settings directly from the unit. → 1.1.5 Phone User
interface Interface Programming
programming → 3 Phone User Interface
Programming
Web user Configuring the unit’s settings by accessing the Web → 1.1.6 Web User Interface
interface user interface from a PC connected to the same Programming
programming network. → 4 Web User Interface
Programming
Configuration file Configuring the unit’s settings beforehand by → 2 General Information on
programming creating configuration files (pre-provisioning), and Provisioning
having the unit download the files from a server on → 5 Configuration File
the Internet and configure its own settings Programming
(provisioning).

1.1.5 Phone User Interface Programming

You can change the settings directly from the unit.
For details about the operations, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see
Introduction).
For details about additional features available with direct commands, see 3 Phone User Interface
Programming.

1.1.5.1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface

Programming
You can change the language used on the LCD. Because the language settings for the LCD of the unit are
not synchronized, you must set the languages individually for the unit.
For details about changing the setting, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see
Introduction).

1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

After connecting the unit to your network, you can configure the unit’s settings by accessing the Web user
interface from a PC connected to the same network. For details, see 4 Web User Interface Programming.

14 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

A. Router
B. Switching Hub
C. PC
D. SIP Phone

1.1.6.1 Password for Web User Interface Programming

To program the unit via the Web user interface, a login account is required. There are 2 types of accounts,
and each has different access privileges.
• User: User accounts are for use by end users. Users can change the settings that are specific to the unit.
• Administrator: Administrator accounts are for use by administrators to manage the system configuration.
Administrators can change all the settings, including the network settings, in addition to the settings that
can be changed from a User account.
A separate password is assigned to each account.
For details, see Access Levels (IDs and Passwords) in 1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User
Interface.

Notice
• You should manage the passwords carefully, and change them regularly.

1.1.6.2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming

When accessing the unit via the Web user interface on a PC connected to the same network, various menus
and settings are displayed. You can change the language used for displaying these setting items. Because
the language setting for the Web user interface is not synchronized with those of the unit, you must set the
languages for each independently.
For details, see 4.4.1 Language Settings.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 15

1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface

Recommended Environment
This unit supports the following specifications:
HTTP Version HTTP/1.0 (RFC 1945), HTTP/1.1 (RFC 2616)
Authentication Method Digest

The Web user interface will operate correctly in the following environments:
Operating System Microsoft® Windows® 7 or Windows 8 operating system
Web Browser Windows Internet Explorer® 7, Windows Internet Explorer 8, Windows
Internet Explorer 9, Windows Internet Explorer 10, Windows Internet
Explorer 11 web browser, Firefox® (32.0.3), Google® Chrome™
(37.0.2062.103)
Language (recommended) English

Opening/Closing the Web Port

To access the Web user interface, you must open the unit’s Web port beforehand. For details, refer to the
Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction).

Configuring Settings from the Unit

To open the unit’s Web port
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "Basic Settings".
2. Tap "Basic Settings".
3. Tap or to select "Other Option".
4. Tap "Other Option".
5. Tap "Embedded Web".
6. Select "On", and then tap "OK".
To close the unit’s Web port
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "Basic Settings".
2. Tap "Basic Settings".
3. Tap or to select "Other Option".
4. Tap "Other Option".
5. Tap "Embedded Web".
6. Select "Off", and then tap "OK".

16 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface

To close the unit’s Web port
1. In the Web user interface, click [Web Port Close].
2. Click OK.

Note
• The Web port of the unit will be closed automatically in the following conditions:
– 3 consecutive unsuccessful login attempts occur.
• The Web port can be set to stay open continuously, through Configuration file programming (→ see
"HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO" in 5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings). However, please recognize the
possibility of unauthorized access to the unit by doing so.

Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)

2 accounts with different access privileges are provided for accessing the Web user interface: User and
Administrator. Each account has its own ID and password, which are required to log in to the Web user
interface.
ID Password
Account Target User Password Restrictions
(default) (default)
User End users user -blank- • When logged in as User, you can
(NULL) change the password for the
User account (→ see 4.4.2 User
Password Settings).
• The password can consist of 6 to
64 ASCII characters (case-
sensitive) (→ see Entering
Characters in 1.1.6.4 Accessing
the Web User Interface).
Administrator Network admin adminpass • When logged in as Administrator,
administrators, you can change the password for
etc. both the User and Administrator
accounts (→ see 4.4.3 Admin
Password Settings).
• The password can consist of 6 to
64 ASCII characters (case-
sensitive) (→ see Entering
Characters in 1.1.6.4 Accessing
the Web User Interface).

Notice
• Only one account can be logged in to the Web user interface at a time. If you try to access the Web
user interface while someone is logged in, you will be denied access.
• You cannot log in to the Web user interface even under the same account as someone who is already
logged in.
• The user password is required to change the settings.
• The IDs can be changed through configuration file programming (→ see "ADMIN_ID" and "USER_ID"
in 5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings).
• If you forget your account IDs or passwords, consult your phone system dealer/service provider.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 17

1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

1.1.6.4 Accessing the Web User Interface

The unit can be configured from the Web user interface.
To access the Web user interface
1. Open your Web browser, and then enter "http://" followed by the unit’s IP address into the address field
of your browser.
a. When the IP address is 192.168.0.1 (IPv4), access the following URL.
http://192.168.0.1/
b. When the IP address is 2001:db8:1f70::999:de8:7648:6e8 (IPv6), access the following URL. With
IPv6, the IP address is enclosed in square brackets ("[" and "]").
http://[2001:db8:1f70::999:de8:7648:6e8]/

Note
• To determine the unit’s IP address, perform the following operations on the unit:
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "System Settings".
3. Tap "Status".
4. Tap or to select "IPv4 Settings"/"IPv6 Settings".
5. Tap "IP Address". (IPv6 only)
2. For authentication, enter your ID (username) and password, and then click OK.
Notice
• The default ID for the User account is "user", and the default password is blank. The ID cannot be
changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration file
programming.
• When you log in as User to the Web user interface for the first time, the [User Password
Settings] screen (→ see 4.4.2 User Password Settings) will be displayed. Enter a new
password, and then perform authentication again with the new password to log in to the Web user
interface.
• The default ID for the Administrator account is "admin", and the default password is "adminpass".
The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through
configuration file programming.
3. The Web user interface window is displayed. Configure the settings for the unit as desired.
4. You can log out from the Web user interface at any time by clicking [Web Port Close].

Controls on the Window

The Web user interface window contains various controls for navigating and configuring settings. The
following figure shows the controls that are displayed on the [Basic Network Settings] screen as an
example:

18 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

Note
• Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer/service provider.
• When you log in to the Web user interface with the User account, the languages of messages
displayed on the configuration screen may differ depending on the country/area of use.
Tabs
Tabs are the top categories for classifying settings. When you click a tab, the corresponding menu items
and the configuration screen of the first menu item appear. There are 6 tabs for the Administrator
account and 3 tabs for the User account. For details about the account types, see Access Levels (IDs
and Passwords) in this section.
Menu
The menu displays the sub-categories of the selected tab.
Configuration Screen
Clicking a menu displays the corresponding configuration screen, which contains the actual settings,
grouped into sections. For details, see 4.2 Status to 4.7.5 Restart.
Buttons
The following standard buttons are displayed in the Web user interface:
Button Function
Web Port Close Closes the Web port of the unit and logs you out of the Web user interface
after a confirmation message is displayed.
Save Applies changes and displays a result message (→ see Result Messages in
this section).
Cancel Discards changes. The settings on the current screen will return to the values
they had before being changed.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 19

1.1.6 Web User Interface Programming

Button Function
Refresh Updates the status information displayed on the screen. This button is
displayed in the upper-right area of the [Network Status] and [VoIP Status]
screens.

Entering Characters
In the Web user interface, when specifying a name, message, password, or other text item, you can enter
any of the ASCII characters displayed in the following table with a white background.

However, there are additional limitations for certain types of fields as follows:
• Number field
– You may only enter a sequence of numeric characters.
• IP Address field
– You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).
– With IPv6, you can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n" where
n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available).
• FQDN field
– You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).
– With IPv6, the IP address is enclosed in square brackets ("[" and "]").
Example: http://[2001:db8:1f70::999:de8:7648:6e8]/
• Display Name field (→ see [Display Name] in 4.6.2.1 Call Features)
– This is the only field in which you can enter Unicode characters.

Result Messages
When you click [Save] after changing the settings on the current configuration screen, one of the following
messages will appear in the upper-left area of the current configuration screen:
Result Message Description Applicable Screens
Complete The operation has successfully All screens except
completed. 4.6.7 Export Phonebook

20 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 1.2 Firmware Update

Result Message Description Applicable Screens

Failed (Parameter Error) The operation failed because: All screens
• Some specified values are out of range
or invalid.
Failed (Memory Access The operation failed because: All screens
Failure)
• Access error to the flash memory
occurred while reading or writing the
data.
Failed (Transfer Failure)*1 The operation failed because: All screens
• A network error occurred during the
data transmission.
Failed (Busy) The operation failed because: All screens
• The unit is in an operation that
accesses the flash memory of the unit.
• When attempting to import/export the 4.6.6 Import Phonebook
phonebook data, the unit is on a call. 4.6.7 Export Phonebook
• While transferring the phonebook data,
a call arrived at the unit.
Failed (Canceled) The operation failed because: 4.6.6 Import Phonebook
4.6.7 Export Phonebook
• While transferring the phonebook data,
the connection with the unit was
interrupted.
Failed (Invalid File) The operation failed because: 4.6.6 Import Phonebook
• Analysis of the received data failed.
Failed (File Size Error) The operation failed because: 4.6.6 Import Phonebook
• The size of the imported phonebook is
too large.
No Data The operation failed because: 4.6.6 Import Phonebook
• The imported phonebook file contains
no valid phonebook entries.
• No phonebook entry is registered in 4.6.7 Export Phonebook
the export source the unit.

*1 "Failed (Transfer Failure)" may not be displayed depending on your Web browser.

1.2 Firmware Update

1.2.1 Firmware Update
You can update the unit’s firmware to improve the unit’s operation. You can configure the unit so that it
automatically downloads the new firmware file from a specified location. The firmware update will be
executed when the unit is restarted.
For details, see 7 Firmware Update.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 21

1.2.1 Firmware Update

A C

B
D

A C

A. Provisioning server
B. Configuration file
C. Firmware server
D. Firmware

Download
Check for update
Firmware download and update

22 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 2
General Information on Provisioning

This section provides an overview of the configuration

file programming procedures for the unit, including pre-
provisioning and provisioning.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 23

2.1 Pre-provisioning

2.1 Pre-provisioning
2.1.1 What is Pre-provisioning?
Pre-provisioning is an auto-provisioning mechanism that automatically obtains the server address saved in
the configuration file administered by the carrier or distributor.
There are two methods for automatically obtaining the server address saved in the configuration file.
1. SIP PnP
The phone multicasts a SIP SUBSCRIBE message and obtains a provisioning server address via a
SIP NOTIFY message.
2. DHCP options
The phone obtains a provisioning server address via the DHCP option information. DHCP options 66,
159 and 160 will be used when the phone’s IP address mode is IPv4, and DHCP option 17 will be used
when the phone’s IP address mode is IPv6.

2.1.2 How to Obtain a Pre-provisioning Server Address

Upon startup, the phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address as follows.
1. When the phone’s IP address mode is IPv4
The phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address using SIP PnP, but when it cannot, it
will attempt to do so from DHCPv4 options.
2. When the phone’s IP address mode is IPv6
The phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address from DHCPv6 options.
3. When the phone’s IP address mode is IPv4/v6 Dual
The phone will attempt to obtain a pre-provisioning server address using SIP PnP, but when it cannot, it
will attempt to do so from DHCPv4 options. When this is not possible, it will attempt to do so from
DHCPv6 options.

Note
• The SIP PnP function is enabled in the initial state. It can be enabled or disabled from the
configuration parameter "SIPPNP_PROV_ENABLE".

2.1.3 Server Address Formats

1. Basic format
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>/<file name>
* The server name (<host>) may be the IP address or the domain.
* Maximum length: 384 characters
2. Macros used with file names
Macro Format {XXXX} Macro Expansion
{MAC} If the URL contains {MAC}, it will be replaced with the
device’s MAC address in uppercase letters.
Example: {MAC} → 0080F0C571EB
{mac} If the URL contains {mac}, it will be replaced with the
device’s MAC address in lowercase letters.
Example: {mac} → 0080f0C571eb
{MODEL} If the URL contains {MODEL}, it will be replaced with
the device’s model name.
Example: {MODEL} → KX-HDV430

24 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.1.4 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address via SIP PnP

Macro Format {XXXX} Macro Expansion

{fwver} If the URL contains {fwver}, it will be replaced with the
device’s firmware version.
Example: {fwver} → 01.000

Note
• Macros distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters.
• Macros not specified above will be treated as strings of characters.

2.1.4 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address via SIP PnP

1. Basic Sequence
At startup, the phone will multicast a SIP SUBSCRIBE message for the ua-profile event, receive a SIP
NOTIFY message from the PnP server and obtain a pre-provisioning server address. It will then obtain
a provisioning server address from the pre-provisioning server.

A B C

D
A

A. SIP Phone
B. PnP Server
C. Pre-provisioning Server
D. xxxxxxxxxxxx.cfg

SUBSCRIBE (multicast)
NOTIFY (unicast)
Body http://server/{MODEL}.cfg
HTTP GET {MODEL}.cfg
200OK

Obtain provisioning server information

CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 25

2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options

CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH

2. Provisioning server URL formats

Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>/<file name>
<scheme> Mandatory Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
<user> Optional User name
<password> Optional Password
<host> Mandatory IP Address or Domain
<port> Optional Port number
<url-path> Optional Full path of the resource
<file name> Mandatory File name

1. Case 1: Protocol, server name and file name

http://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg
2. Case 2: Protocol, server name, path and file name
http://10.0.0.1/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
3. Case 3 Protocol, user name, password, server name and file name
http://id:[email protected]/{MAC}.cfg
http://id:[email protected]/{MAC}.cfg

2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP

Options
1. DHCPv4
a. Basic Sequence
In a DHCPv4 environment, the phone will transmit a DHCP DISCOVER message for DHCP
options (66, 67, 159 and 160), receive a DHCP OFFER message, obtain a pre-provisioning server
address and obtain a provisioning server address from the pre-provisioning server.

Note
• DHCP options (66, 159 and 160) are enabled in the initial state and can be enabled and
disabled from the configuration parameters.
DHCP options Configuration parameter Priority
Option 66 OPTION66_ENABLE 3
Option 159 OPTION159_PROV_ENABLE 2
Option 160 OPTION160_PROV_ENABLE 1

26 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options

A B C

D
A

D F

A. SIP Phone
B. DHCP Server
C. Pre-provisioning Server
D. KX-HDV430.cfg

DHCP DISCOVER
DHCP OFFER
DHCP REQUEST
DHCP ACK
TFTP {MODEL}.cfg
200OK

Obtain provisioning server information

CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH

b. Format for pre-provisioning files obtained from DHCP option 67

Format: <path>/<file name>
<path> Optional path
<file name> Mandatory file name

1. Case 1: File name only

{MODEL}.cfg
2. Case 2: Path and file name
pana/{MODEL}.cfg

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 27

2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options

c. Format for pre-provisioning server address obtained from DHCP options 159 and 160
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>
<scheme> Mandatory Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
<user> Optional User name
<password> Optional Password
<host> Mandatory IP Address or Domain
<port> Optional Port number
<url-path> Optional Full path of the resource

The obtained file is the <path>/<file name> set in DHCP option 67.
If DHCP option 67 is not set, {MODEL}.cfg is obtained.
The examples in parentheses below are when {MODEL}.cfg is set for DHCP option 67.
1. Case 1: Protocol and server name
http://10.0.0.1 (http://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg)
http://prov.com (http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg)
2. Case 2: Protocol, server name and path
http://10.0.0.1/pana (http://10.0.0.1/pana/{MODEL}.cfg)
http://prov.com/pana (http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg)
3. Case 3: Protocol, user name, password and server name
http://id:[email protected] (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg)
http://id:[email protected] (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg)
d. Format for pre-provisioning server address obtained from DHCP option 66
Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>
<scheme> Optional Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
<user> Optional User name
<password> Optional Password
<host> Mandatory IP Address or Domain
<port> Optional Port number
<url-path> Optional Full path of the resource

If DHCP option 66 does not include <scheme>, {MODEL}.cfg is obtained.

If the last character of DHCP option 66 is "/", {MODEL}.cfg is obtained.
Otherwise DHCP option 66 includes <file name>.
1. Case 1: Protocol and server name
http://10.0.0.1/ (http://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg)
http://prov.com/ (http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg)
2. Case 2: Protocol, server name and path
http://10.0.0.1/pana/ (http://10.0.0.1/pana/{MODEL}.cfg)
http://prov.com/pana/ (http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg)
3. Case 3: Protocol, user name, password and server name
http://id:[email protected]/ (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg)
http://id:[email protected]/ (http://id:[email protected]/{MODEL}.cfg)
4. Case 4: Server name
tftp://10.0.0.1 (tftp://10.0.0.1/{MODEL}.cfg)
tftp://prov.com (tftp://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg)

28 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.1.5 Obtaining a Provisioning Server Address from DHCP Options

2. DHCPv6
a. In a DHCPv6 environment, the phone will transmit a DHCPv6 REQUEST message for DHCP
option 17, receive a DHCPv6 REPLY message, obtain a pre-provisioning server address and
obtain a provisioning server address from the pre-provisioning server.

Note
• DHCP option 17 is enabled in the initial state and can be enabled and disabled from the
configuration parameters ("DHCPV6_OPTION17_PROV_ENABLE").

A B C

D
A

D D

A. SIP Phone
B. DHCP Server
C. Pre-provisioning Server
D. KX-HDV430.cfg

DHCPv6 REQUEST
DHCPv6 REPLY
TFTP {MODEL}.cfg
200OK

Obtain provisioning server information

CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH

b. Format for pre-provisioning addresses obtained from DHCPv6 option 17

Format: <scheme>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>
<scheme> Mandatory Protocol (TFTP/FTP/HTTP/HTTPS)
<user> Optional User name
<password> Optional Password
<host> Mandatory IP Address or Domain

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 29

2.2 Provisioning

<port> Optional Port number

<url-path> Optional Full path of the resource
<file name> Mandatory File name

1. Case 1: Protocol, server name, and file name

http://[2001:0db8:bd05:01d2:288a:1fc0:0001:10ee]/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/{MODEL}.cfg
2. Case 2: Protocol, server name, path and file name
http://[2001:db8::1234:0:0:9abc]/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
http://prov.com/pana/{MODEL}.cfg
3. Case 3: Protocol, user name, password, server name and file name
http://id:pass@[2001:db8::9abc]/{MAC}.cfg
http://id:[email protected]/{MAC}.cfg

2.2 Provisioning
2.2.1 What is Provisioning?
After pre-provisioning has been performed (→ see 2.1 Pre-provisioning), you can set up the unit
automatically by downloading the configuration file stored on the provisioning server into the unit. This is
called "provisioning".

2.2.2 Protocols for Provisioning

Provisioning can be performed over HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and TFTP. The protocol you should use differs
depending on how you will perform provisioning. Normally, HTTP, HTTPS, or FTP is used for provisioning. If
you are transmitting encrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTP. If you are
transmitting unencrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTPS. You may not be able to
use FTP depending on the conditions of the network router or the network to be used.

2.2.3 Configuration File

This section gives concrete examples of the functions of the configuration file and how to manage it.
The configuration file is a text file that contains the various settings that are necessary for operating the unit.
The files are normally stored on a server maintained by your phone system dealer/service provider, and will
be downloaded to the units as required. All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file.
You can ignore settings that already have the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.
For details about setting parameters and their descriptions, see 5 Configuration File Programming.

Using 3 Types of Configuration Files

The unit can download up to 3 configuration files. One way to take advantage of this is by classifying the
configuration files into the following 3 types:
Type Usage
Master configuration file Configure settings that are common to all units, such as the SIP
server address, and the IP addresses of the DNS and NTP
(Network Time Protocol) servers managed by your phone system
dealer/service provider. This configuration file is used by all the
units.

Example of the configuration file’s URL:

http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg

30 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files

Type Usage
Product configuration file Configure settings that are required for a particular model, such as
the default setting of the privacy mode. This configuration file is
used by all the units that have the same model name.
The same number of configuration files as models being used on
the network are stored on the provisioning server, and units with
the same model name download the corresponding configuration
file.

Example of the configuration file’s URL:

http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MODEL}.cfg

Note
• When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MODEL}" is
replaced by the model name of the unit.
Standard configuration file Configure settings that are unique to each unit, such as the phone
number, user ID, password, etc.
The same number of configuration files as units are stored on the
provisioning server, and each unit downloads the corresponding
standard configuration file.

Example of the configuration file’s URL:

http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg

Note
• When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MAC}" is
replaced by the MAC address of the unit.

Depending on the situation, you can use all 3 types of configuration files, and can also use only a standard
configuration file.
The above example shows only one possible way to use configuration files. Depending on the requirements
of your phone system dealer/service provider, there are a number of ways to use configuration files
effectively.

Using 2 Types of Configuration Files

The following table shows an example of using 2 types of configuration files: a master configuration file to
configure settings common to all units, and product configuration files to configure settings common to
particular groups.

Using Product Configuration Files According to the Position Groups

You can use product configuration files for different groups or for multiple users within the same group.
Department Name URL of Product Configuration File
Sales http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigSales.cfg
Planning http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigPlanning.cfg

2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files

Downloading a Configuration File via the Web User Interface
The following procedure describes how to enable downloading a configuration file via the Web User
Interface to be used for programming the unit.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 31

2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files

1. Confirm that the provisioning server’s IP address/FQDN and directory are correct, and store the
configuration files in the directory (e.g., http://provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/Config_Sample.cfg).
2. Enter the IP address of the unit into the PC’s Web browser (→ see 1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web
User Interface).
3. Log in as the administrator (→ see Access Levels (IDs and Passwords) in 1.1.6.3 Before Accessing
the Web User Interface).
4. Click the [Maintenance] tab, and then select [Provisioning Maintenance].
5. Enter the URL set up in Step 1 in [Standard File URL].
6. Click [Save].

Timing of Downloading
A unit downloads configuration files when it starts up, at regular intervals, and when directed to do so by the
server.
Download Timing Explanation
Startup The configuration files are downloaded when the unit starts up.

32 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files

Download Timing Explanation

At regular intervals of time The configuration files are downloaded at specified intervals of time, set
in minutes. In the example below, the unit has been programmed to
download configuration files from the provisioning server every 3 days
(4320 minutes).

CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL="4320"

A B

A. SIP Phone
B. Provisioning Server

Power on
3 days later
6 days later

: Check
: Download

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 33

2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files

Download Timing Explanation

The configuration files are downloaded periodically under the following
conditions:
• In the configuration file, add the line, CFG_CYCLIC="Y".
– Set an interval (minutes) by specifying "CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then select [Yes] for [Cyclic Auto Resync].
– Enter an interval (minutes) in [Resync Interval].

Note
• The interval may be determined by your phone system dealer/
service provider. A maximum interval of 28 days (40320 minutes)
can be set on the unit.

34 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files

Download Timing Explanation

At a specified time each day After the unit is powered on, it will download configuration files once per
day at the specified time.

CFG_RESYNC_TIME="02:00"

A
B

A. SIP Phone
B. Provisioning Server

power on at 12:00
02:00
02:00

: Check
: Download

• In the configuration file:

– Set a time by specifying "CFG_RESYNC_TIME".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then enter the time in [Time Resync].

Note
• The time is specified using a 24-hour clock ("00:00" to "23:59").

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 35

2.2.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example

Download Timing Explanation

When directed When a setting needs to be changed immediately, units can be directed
to download the configuration files by sending them a NOTIFY message
that includes a special event from the SIP server.
• In the configuration file:
– Specify the special event text in "CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then enter the special event text in [Header Value for Resync
Event].
Generally, "check-sync" or "resync" is set as the special event text.

2.2.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example

This section gives an example of how to set up the units and provisioning server when configuring 2 units
with configuration files. The standard configuration files and the master configuration file are used in this
example.

Conditions
Item Description/Setting
Provisioning server FQDN prov.example.com
Units’ MAC addresses • 0080F0111111
• 0080F0222222
URL of the configuration files Configure the following 2 settings either by pre-provisioning or through
the Web user interface. The values of both settings must be the same.
• CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/
Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg"
• CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/
Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg"
Directory on the provisioning Create the "Panasonic" directory just under the HTTP root directory of
server containing the the provisioning server.
configuration files
File name of configuration Store the following configuration files in the "Panasonic" directory.
files
• Contains the common settings for the 2 units:
– ConfigCommon.cfg
• Contains the settings unique to each unit:
– Config0080F0111111.cfg
– Config0080F0222222.cfg

To set up the provisioning server

1. Connect the units to the network, and turn them on.
a. The unit with the MAC address 0080F0111111 accesses the following URLs:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0111111.cfg

36 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.2.6 Encryption

b. The unit with the MAC address 0080F0222222 accesses the following URLs:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0222222.cfg

Example Provisioning Direction from the Server

The following figure shows an example NOTIFY message from the server, directing the units to perform
provisioning. The text "check-sync" is specified for "CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP".

NOTIFY sip:[email protected] SIP/2.0

Via: SIP/2.0/UDP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060;branch=abcdef-ghijkl
From: sip:[email protected]
To: sip:[email protected]
Date: Wed, 1 Jan 2014 01:01:01 GMT
Call-ID: 123456-1234567912345678
CSeq: 1 NOTIFY
Contact: sip:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060
Event: check-sync
Content-Length: 0

2.2.6 Encryption
Secure Provisioning Methods
In order to perform provisioning securely, there are 2 methods for transferring configuration files securely
between the unit and the server.
Which method is used depends on the environment and equipment available from the phone system.

Method 1: Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files

A B
CFG_FILE_KEY2 CFG_FILE_KEY2

A. Unencrypted configuration file

B. Encrypted configuration file

To use this method, an encryption key is required to encrypt and decrypt the configuration files. A preset
encryption key unique to each unit, an encryption key set by your phone system dealer/service provider,
etc., is used for the encryption. When the unit downloads an encrypted configuration file, it will decrypt the
file using the same encryption key, and then configure the settings automatically.

Method 2: Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS

This method uses SSL, which is commonly used on the Internet, to transfer configuration files between the
unit and server. For more secure communication, you can use a root certificate.

Notice
• To avoid redundant data transfer over the network, important data, such as the encryption key used to
encrypt the configuration files and the root certificate for SSL, should be configured through pre-
provisioning as much as possible.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 37

2.3 Priority of Setting Methods

• It is recommended that you encrypt the data in order to keep the communication secure when
transferring configuration files.
However, if you are using the units within a secure environment, such as within an intranet, it is not
necessary to encrypt the data.
To decrypt configuration files, the unit uses the encryption key registered to it beforehand. The unit
determines the encryption status by checking the extension of the downloaded configuration file.
For details about encrypting configuration files, contact the appropriate person in your organization.
Extension of Configuration
Configuration File Parameters Used for Decrypting
File
".e2c" CFG_FILE_KEY2
".e3c" CFG_FILE_KEY3
Other than ".e2c", and ".e3c" Processed as unencrypted configuration files.
The extension ".cfg" should be used for unencrypted configuration files.

Comparison of the 2 Methods

The following table compares the characteristics for the 2 transfer methods.
Transferring Encrypted Transferring Configuration Files
Configuration Files Using HTTPS
Provisioning server load Light Heavy
(The server encrypts data for each
transmission.)
Operation load Necessary to encrypt data Unnecessary to encrypt data
beforehand. beforehand.
Management of Files must be decrypted and re- It is easy to manage files because
configuration files encrypted for maintenance. they are not encrypted on the server.
Security of data on the High Low
server when operating (Configuration files are readable by
anyone with access to the server.)

Moreover, there is another method: configuration files are not encrypted while stored on the server, and
then, using the encryption key registered to the unit beforehand, they are encrypted when they are
transferred. This method is particularly useful when several units are configured to download a common
configuration file using different encryption keys. However, as when downloading an unencrypted
configuration file using HTTPS, the server will be heavily burdened when transferring configuration files.

2.3 Priority of Setting Methods

The same settings can be configured by different configuration methods: provisioning, Web user interface
programming, etc. This section explains which value is applied when the same setting is specified by
multiple methods.
The following table shows the priority with which settings from each method are applied (lower numbers
indicate higher priority):
Priority Setting Method
3 The factory default settings for the unit
2 Pre-provisioning with the configuration file

38 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.4 Configuration File Specifications

Priority Setting Method

1-1 Provisioning with the standard configuration file
1-2 Provisioning with the product configuration file
1
1-3 Provisioning with the master configuration file
Settings configured from the Web user interface or the phone user interface

According to the table, settings configured later override previous settings (i.e., settings listed lower in the
table have a higher priority).

Notice
• Make sure to perform Reset to Factory Default before connecting the unit to a different phone system.
Contact your phone system dealer/service provider for further information.

2.4 Configuration File Specifications

The specifications of the configuration files are as follows:

File Format
The configuration file is in plain text format.

Lines in Configuration Files

A configuration file consists of a sequence of lines, with the following conditions:
• Each line must end with "<CR><LF>".

Note
<CR> or <LF> alone may be acceptable under certain conditions.
• Lines that begin with "#" are considered comments.
• Configuration files must start with a comment line containing the following designated character sequence
(44 bytes):
# Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File #
The hexadecimal notation of this sequence is:
23 20 50 61 6E 61 73 6F 6E 69 63 20 53 49 50 20
50 68 6F 6E 65 20 53 74 61 6E 64 61 72 64 20 46
6F 72 6D 61 74 20 46 69 6C 65 20 23
• To prevent the designated character sequence being altered by chance, it is recommended that the
configuration file starts with the comment line shown below:
# Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
• Configuration files must end with an empty line.
• Each parameter line is written in the form of XXX="yyy" (XXX: parameter name, yyy: parameter value).
The value must be enclosed by double quotation marks.
• A parameter line written over multiple lines is not allowed. It will cause an error on the configuration file,
resulting in invalid provisioning.

Configuration Parameters
• The unit supports multiple telephone lines. For some parameters, the value for each line must be
specified independently. A parameter name with the suffix "_1" is the parameter for line 1; "_2" for line
2; ...; "_16" for line 16, and so on.
Examples of setting the line (phone number) for accessing a voice mail server:

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 39

2.4 Configuration File Specifications

"VM_NUMBER_1": for line 1,

"VM_NUMBER_2": for line 2, ...
"VM_NUMBER_16": for line 16

Note
• The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used, as follows:
– KX-HDV430: 1–16
• Some parameter values can be specified as "empty" to set the parameter values to empty.
Example:
NTP_ADDR=""
• The parameters have no order.
• If the same parameter is specified in a configuration file more than once, the value specified first is
applied.
• All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file. You can ignore settings that already
have the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.
• Boolean parameters (BOOLEAN) accept all of the following configurations.
"Y": "Y", "y", "Yes", "YES", "yes"
"N": "N", "n", "No", "NO", "no"

Parameter Extensions
You can use parameter extensions to specify parameters as Read-Only or Carrier Default.

Read-Only Specification
• When "?R" or "?r" is specified, the phone user interface and Web user interface for the parameter in
question is restricted to Read-Only.
* Restricting the phone user interface to Read-Only
The Read-Only parameter settings menu appears, but an error occurs during registration.
* Restricting the Web user interface to Read-Only
The Read-Only parameter settings menu appears grayed out and nothing can be entered.

Note
• Parameters that can be configured from the device and from the Web can be confirmed from
footnotes 1-3 on the parameter names in "5.1 Configuration File Parameter List".
• When "?R" or "?r" is not specified, the phone user interface and Web user interface are both readable
and writable.
* Optional specifications for "?R" and "?r" are enabled when the last parameter in question is configured.
Example:
(1) Import XXX?R="111" from the Web as a standard file.
– XXX: Read-Only
– XXX operational information: 111
(2) Import XXX="222" from the Web as a product file.
– XXX : Read/Write
– XXX operational information: 222
* When configurations in (1) and (2) are used, the higher priority standard file will be enabled and the
value for XXX in Read-Only mode will be 111.

Carrier Default Specification

40 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 2.5 Configuration File Examples

• When "?!" is specified, applicable parameter values are managed as carrier default values when applied
to operational information.
* Carrier default values are applied once a reset to carrier defaults is executed. Carrier defaults will also
be initialized when a reset to device defaults is executed.
* Once "?!" is specified, the parameter in question will be designated as a carrier default even if said
parameter is configured without "?!". (This setting will remain in place until restored to factory default.)

Specification of Multiple Parameter Extensions

• One parameter can be assigned multiple extensions.
Example: XXX?R?!="" / XXX?!?r=""

Parameter Extension Configuration Example

1. In the configuration file, set IP Addressing Mode to IPv4 and Read-Only
Example parameter: IP_ADDR_MODE?R="0" ("0": IPv4)
2. If an error occurs when attempting to set the IP Mode to IPv6, see To configure IP Mode (IPv4, IPv6,
IPv4&IPv6) in Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit.

2.5 Configuration File Examples

The following examples of configuration files are provided on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction).
• Simplified Example of the Configuration File
• Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File

2.5.1 Examples of Codec Settings

Setting the Codec Priority to (1)G.729A, (2)PCMU, (3)G.722
## Codec Settings
# Enable G722
CODEC_ENABLE0_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY0_1="3"
# Disable PCMA
CODEC_ENABLE1_1="N"
# Enable G729A
CODEC_ENABLE3_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY3_1="1"
# Enable PCMU
CODEC_ENABLE4_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY4_1="2"

Setting Narrow-band Codecs (PCMA and G.729A)

## Codec Settings
# Disable G722
CODEC_ENABLE0_1="N"
# Enable PCMA
CODEC_ENABLE1_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY1_1="1"
# Enable G729A
CODEC_ENABLE3_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY3_1="1"
# Disable PCMU
CODEC_ENABLE4_1="N"

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 41

2.5.2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions

Setting the G.729A Codec Only

## Codec Settings
# Disable G722
CODEC_ENABLE0_1="N"
# Disable PCMA
CODEC_ENABLE1_1="N"
# Enable G729A
CODEC_ENABLE3_1="Y"
CODEC_PRIORITY3_1="1"
# Disable PCMU
CODEC_ENABLE4_1="N"

2.5.2 Example with Incorrect Descriptions

The following listing shows an example of a configuration file that contains incorrect formatting:

An improper description is entered in the first line. A configuration file must start with the designated
character sequence "# Panasonic SIP Phone Standard Format File #".
Comment lines start in the middle of the lines.

Incorrect Example
# This is a simplified sample configuration file. A

############################################################
# Configuration Setting #
############################################################

CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://config.example.com/0123456789AB.cfg"
# URL of this configuration file

############################################################
# SIP Settings #
# Suffix "_1" indicates this parameter is for "line 1". #
############################################################

SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com" # IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server

B
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com" # IP Address or FQDN of proxy server

42 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 3
Phone User Interface Programming

This section explains how to configure the unit by

entering direct commands through the phone user
interface.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 43

3.1 Phone User Interface Programming

3.1 Phone User Interface Programming

This section provides information about the features that can be configured directly from the unit, but that
are not mentioned in the Operating Instructions.

3.1.1 Opening/Closing the Web Port

To access the Web user interface, you must open the unit’s Web port beforehand.

To open the unit’s Web port

1. In standby mode, tap or to select "Basic Settings".
2. Tap "Basic Settings".
3. Tap or to select "Other Option".
4. Tap "Other Option".
5. Tap "Embedded Web".
6. Select "On", and then tap "OK".
To close the unit’s Web port
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "Basic Settings".
2. Tap "Basic Settings".
3. Tap or to select "Other Option".
4. Tap "Other Option".
5. Tap "Embedded Web".
6. Select "Off", and then tap "OK".

44 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 4
Web User Interface Programming

This section provides information about the settings

available in the Web user interface.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 45

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

The following tables show all the settings that you can configure from the Web user interface and the access
levels. For details about each setting, see the reference pages listed.
For details about setting up Web user interface programming, see 1.1.6 Web User Interface
Programming.

Status
Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Version Version Information Model ü ü page 58
Information
IPL Version ü ü page 58
Firmware Version ü ü page 58
Network Status Network Common MAC Address ü ü page 59
Ethernet Link Status ü ü page 59
IP Address Mode ü ü page 59
IPv4 Connection Mode ü ü page 59
IP Address ü ü page 60
Subnet Mask ü ü page 60
Default Gateway ü ü page 60
DNS1 ü ü page 60
DNS2 ü ü page 60
IPv6 Connection Mode ü ü page 60
IP Address ü ü page 61
Prefix ü ü page 61
Default Gateway ü ü page 61
DNS1 ü ü page 61
DNS2 ü ü page 61
VLAN Setting Mode ü ü page 61
LAN Port VLAN ID ü ü page 62
LAN Port VLAN Priority ü ü page 62
PC Port VLAN ID ü ü page 62
PC Port VLAN Priority ü ü page 62
VoIP Status VoIP Status Line No. ü ü page 62
Phone Number ü ü page 62
VoIP Status ü ü page 63

*1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows:

U: User; A: Administrator

46 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.

Network
Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Basic Network IP Addressing Mode IP Addressing Mode*2 ü page 64
Settings
IPv4 Connection Mode *2
ü page 64
DHCP Host Name*3 ü page 64
IP Address *2
ü page 64
Subnet Mask*2 ü page 65
Default Gateway *2
ü page 65
Auto DNS via DHCP*2 ü page 65
DNS1 *2
ü page 65
DNS2*2 ü page 66
IPv6 Connection Mode *2
ü page 66
IP Address*2 ü page 66
Prefix*2 ü page 66
Default Gateway*2 ü page 67
Auto DNS via DHCP*2 ü page 67
DNS1*2 ü page 67
DNS2*2 ü page 67
Ethernet Port Link Speed/Duplex LAN Port *2
ü page 68
Settings Mode
PC Port*2 ü page 68
LLDP Enable LLDP *2
ü page 69
Packet Interval*3 ü page 69
PC VLAN ID *2
ü page 69
PC Priority*2 ü page 69
VLAN Enable VLAN *2
ü page 70
IP Phone VLAN ID*2 ü page 70
IP Phone Priority *2
ü page 70
PC VLAN ID*2 ü page 70
PC Priority *2
ü page 70
HTTP Client HTTP Client HTTP Version*3 ü page 71
Settings
HTTP User Agent *3
ü page 71
Authentication ID*2 ü page 72
Authentication Password *2
ü page 72

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 47

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Proxy Server Enable Proxy *3
ü page 72
Proxy Server Address*3 ü page 72
Proxy Server Port *3
ü page 73
STUN Settings STUN Server Address*3 ü page 73
Port*3 ü page 73
Binding Interval*3 ü page 74
Multicast Paging Multicast Paging Group 1–5 – – –
Settings
- IPv4 Address*3 ü page 74
- IPv6 Address*3 ü page 74
- Port *3
ü page 75
- Priority*3 (Group 1–3 only) ü page 75
- Label *3
ü page 75
- Enable Transmission*3 ü page 75
LDAP Settings LDAP Enable LDAP *3
ü page 76
Server Address*3 ü page 76
Port *3
ü page 76
User ID*3 ü page 76
Password *3
ü page 77
Max Hits*3 ü page 77
Name Filter *3
ü page 77
Number Filter*3 ü page 77
Name Attributes *3
ü page 77
Number Attributes*3 ü page 77
Distinguished Name(Base ü page 78
DN)*2
Enable DNS SRV lookup*3 ü page 78
Xtended Service Xtended Service Enable Xtended Service*3 ü page 78
Settings
Server Address*3 ü page 78
Port*3 ü page 79
Protocol*3 ü page 79
SIP Credentials*3 ü page 79
Xtended Service Line 1–16 – – –
Settings
User ID*2 ü page 80

48 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Password *2
ü page 80
Enable Phonebook*3 ü page 80
Phonebook Type *3
ü page 80
Enable Call Log*3 ü page 80
Enable Visual Voice Mail*3 ü page 81
UC Settings Presence Feature Enable UC*3 ü page 81
Server Address*3 ü page 81
Local XMPP Port*3 ü page 82
User ID*2 ü page 82
Password *2
ü page 82
XML Application XML Application Enable XMLAPP*3 ü page 83
Settings
User ID *3
ü page 83
Password*3 ü page 83
Local XML Port *3
ü page 84
Bootup URL*3 ü page 84
Initial URL *3
ü page 84
Incoming Call URL*3 ü page 84
Talking URL *3
ü page 84
Making Call URL*3 ü page 84
Call Log URL *3
ü page 85
Idling URL*3 ü page 85
Enable FF Key *3
ü page 85
XML Phonebook LDAP URL*3 ü page 85
User ID *3
ü page 85
Password*3 ü page 86
Max Hits*3 ü page 86
ACD Settings ACD Settings Line 1–16 – – –
Enable ACD*3 ü page 86
Call Center Call Center Settings Line 1–16 – – –
Settings
Enable Call Center*3 ü page 87
Disposition Code *3
ü page 87
Customer Originated Trace*3 ü page 88
Hoteling Event *3
ü page 88

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 49

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
- User ID *3
ü page 88
- Password*3 ü page 88
Status Event *3
ü page 88

*1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows:

U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
*2 This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file
programming).
*3 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.

System
Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Language Selectable Language IP Phone *2
ü page 89
Settings
Web Language*2 ü page 90
Language Settings IP Phone *2
ü ü page 91
Web Language*2 ü ü page 91
User Password User Password Current Password ü ü page 92
Settings
New Password*2 ü ü page 92
Confirm New Password ü ü page 93
Admin Password Admin Password Current Password ü page 93
Settings
New Password *2
ü page 94
Confirm New Password ü page 94

50 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Time Adjust Synchronization Server Address *2
ü page 94
Settings (Synchronisation)
Synchronization Interval ü page 95
(Synchronisation Interval)*2
Time Zone Time Zone*2 ü page 95
Daylight Saving Time Enable DST (Enable Summer ü page 95
(Summer Time) Time)*2
DST Offset (Summer Time ü page 95
Offset)*2
Start Day and Time of Month*2 ü page 95
DST (Start Day and
Day of Week ü page 96
Time of Summer Time)
Time*2 ü page 97
End Day and Time of Month*2 ü page 97
DST (End Day and
Day of Week ü page 97
Time of Summer Time)
Time*2 ü page 98
Advanced IP Phone Enable Admin Ability *2
ü page 98
Settings
Enable IP Phone Lock*2 ü page 99
Password for Unlocking *2
ü page 99
Import Display Import Display File File Name ü ü page 99
File
Wait Time Wait Time Wait Time*2 ü ü page 100
Communication Communication Phone Number*2 ü page 101
Camera Camera Settings [No.
Name *2
ü page 101
1]–[No. 16]
Ringtone [ 1–32 ]*2 ü page 101

*1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows:

U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
*2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.

VoIP
Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
SIP Settings User Agent User Agent *2
ü page 102
NAT Identity Enable Rport (RFC 3581)*2 ü page 102
Enable Port Punching for ü page 102
SIP*2

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 51

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Enable Port Punching for ü page 103
RTP*2
SIP Settings Basic Phone Number*2 ü page 103
[Line 1]–[Line 16]
Registrar Server Address*2 ü page 103
Registrar Server Port*2 ü page 104
Proxy Server Address *2
ü page 104
Proxy Server Port*2 ü page 104
Presence Server Address*2 ü page 104
Presence Server Port*2 ü page 104
Outbound Proxy Server ü page 104
Address*2
Outbound Proxy Server Port*2 ü page 105
Service Domain*2 ü page 105
Authentication ID *2
ü page 105
Authentication Password*2 ü page 105
Advanced SIP Packet QoS (DSCP) *2
ü page 105
Enable DNS SRV lookup*2 ü page 106
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP *2
ü page 106
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP*2 ü page 106
SRV lookup Prefix for TLS *2
ü page 106
Local SIP Port*2 ü page 107
SIP URI *2
ü page 107
T1 Timer*2 ü page 107
T2 Timer *2
ü page 108
REGISTER Expires Timer*2 ü page 108
Enable Session Timer (RFC ü page 108
4028)*2
Session Timer Method*2 ü page 108
Enable 100rel (RFC 3262) *2
ü page 109
Enable SSAF (SIP Source ü page 109
Address Filter)*2
Enable c=0.0.0.0 Hold (RFC ü page 109
2543)*2
Transport Protocol*2 ü page 109

52 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
TLS Mode *2
ü page 110
VoIP Settings RTP RTP Packet Time*2 ü page 111
Minimum RTP Port Number *2
ü page 111
Maximum RTP Port Number*2 ü page 111
Telephone-event Payload ü page 111
Type*2
Voice Quality Report Server Address*2 ü page 111
Port*2 ü page 112
Enable PUBLISH*2 ü page 112
Alert Report Trigger*2 ü page 112
Threshold MOS-LQ (Critical) *2
ü page 112
Threshold MOS-LQ ü page 112
(Warning)*2
Threshold Delay (Critical)*2 ü page 113
Threshold Delay (Warning)*2 ü page 113
VoIP Settings Basic G.722 – – –
[Line1]–[Line16]
- Enable*2 ü page 114
- Priority *2
ü page 114
PCMA – – –
- Enable *2
ü page 115
- Priority*2 ü page 115
G.729A - - -
- Enable*2 ü page 115
- Priority *2
ü page 115
PCMU – – –
- Enable *2
ü page 115
- Priority*2 ü page 115
DTMF Type ü page 116
Advanced RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)*2 ü page 116
RTCP Packet QoS (DSCP)*2 ü page 116
Enable RTCP*2 ü page 116
Enable RTCP-XR*2 ü page 116
RTCP&RTCP-XR Interval *2
ü page 117
SRTP Mode*2 ü page 117

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 53

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP ü page 117
by Conference*2
Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP ü page 117
by Transfer*2

*1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows:

U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
*2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.

Telephone
Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Call Control Call Control Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice ü page 118
Mail Server*2
Conference Server URI*2 ü page 118
First-digit Timeout*2 ü page 119
Inter-digit Timeout*2 ü page 119
Timer for Dial Plan*2 ü page 119
Enable # Key as delimiter *2
ü page 119
International Call Prefix*2 ü page 119
Country Calling Code *2
ü page 120
National Access Code*2 ü page 120
Default Line for Outgoing *2
ü ü page 120
Call Park Number*2 ü page 120
Enable Call Park Key *2
ü page 121
Park Retrieve Number*2 ü page 121
Directed Call Pickup *2
ü page 121
Emergency Call Phone 1–5*2 ü page 121
Numbers
Call Rejection Phone 1–30*2 ü ü page 121
Numbers
Call Control [Line Call Features Display Name*2 ü page 122
1]–[Line 16]
Voice Mail Access Number *2
ü page 122
Enable Anonymous Call*4 ü ü page 123
Enable Block Anonymous ü ü page 123
Call*4

54 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Enable Do Not Disturb *3
ü ü page 123
Enable Call Waiting*2 ü page 123
Enable Call Forwarding ü ü page 123
Always*3
Forwarding Number ü ü page 123
(Always)*3
Enable Call Forwarding ü ü page 124
Busy*3
Forwarding Number (Busy)*3 ü ü page 124
Enable Call Forwarding No ü ü page 124
Answer*3
Forwarding Number (No ü ü page 124
Answer)*3
Ring Counts (No Answer)*3 ü ü page 124
Enable Shared Call *2
ü page 124
Enable Key Synchronization ü page 125
(Enable Key
Synchronisation)*2
Enable Call Park Notification*2 ü page 125
Enable Click to Call*2 ü page 125
Enable Executive Setting *2
ü page 125
Enable Assistant Setting*2 ü page 126
MoH Server URI *2
ü page 126
Resource List URI*2 ü page 126
Dial Plan Dial Plan (max 1000 ü page 126
columns)*2
Call Even If Dial Plan Does ü page 126
Not Match*2
Hotline Settings Hotline Enable*2 ü page 127
Hotline Number*2 ü ü page 128
Hotline Delay *2
ü page 128
Flexible Key Flexible Key Settings No. 1–24 — — —
Settings
Type*2 ü ü page 129
Parameter*2 ü ü page 130
Label Name *2
ü ü page 130

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 55

4.1 Web User Interface Setting List

Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Tone Settings Dial Tone Tone Frequencies ü page 131
Tone Timings*2 ü page 132
Busy Tone Tone Frequencies ü page 132
Tone Timings*2 ü page 132
Ringing Tone Tone Frequencies ü page 133
Tone Timings*2 ü page 133
Stutter Tone Tone Frequencies ü page 133
Tone Timings*2 ü page 134
Reorder Tone Tone Frequencies ü page 134
Tone Timings *2
ü page 134
Import Import Phonebook File Name ü ü page 136
Phonebook
Export Export Phonebook – ü ü page 136
Phonebook
Video Call Default Call Mode Default Call Mode*4 ü page 138
Settings
Screen Mode Screen Mode*4 ü page 139
Send Image Send Image at Start*4 ü page 139
Rate Settings Bit Rate *4
ü page 139
Bit Rate Use*4 ü page 139
Frame Rate *4
ü page 140
Image Size*4 ü page 140
DSS Console DSS 1-5 Key No. 1–200 *5
— — —
Type*2 ü ü page 141
Parameter *2
ü ü page 142
Label Name*2 ü ü page 142

*1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows:

U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
*2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
*3 This setting can also be configured through phone user interface programming.
*4 This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file
programming).
*5 Each DSS console supports 40 keys. DSS console 1 uses keys 1-40, DSS console 2 uses keys 41-80, etc.

56 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.2 Status

Maintenance
Access
Menu Item Section Title Setting Level*1 Ref.
U A
Provisioning Provisioning Standard File URL *2
ü page 143
Maintenance Maintenance
Product File URL*2 ü page 143
Master File URL *2
ü page 144
Cyclic Auto Resync*2 ü page 144
Resync Interval *2
ü page 144
Time Resync*2 ü page 144
Header Value for Resync ü page 144
Event*2
Firmware Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update*2 ü page 145
Maintenance
Firmware File URL *2
ü page 145
Firmware Version*2 ü page 146
Export Logging Export Logging File Logging File Type ü page 146
File
Reset to Defaults Reset to Carrier The following settings will be ü page 147
Defaults reset to carrier default values
when you click [Reset to
Carrier Defaults].
Restart Restart Click [Restart] to proceed. ü page 147
Restarting will take a few
moments.

*1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows:

U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
*2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.

4.2 Status
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Status] tab.

4.2.1 Version Information

This screen allows you to view the current version information such as the model number and the firmware
version of the unit.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 57

4.2.2 Network Status

4.2.1.1 Version Information

Model
Description Indicates the model number of the unit (reference only).
Value Range Model number

IPL Version
Description Indicates the version of the IPL (Initial Program Load) that runs when
starting the unit and the SIP software version of the unit (reference
only).
Value Range IPL version ("nn.nnn" [n=0–9])
SIP software version ("[SIP: n.nn]" [n=0–9])

Firmware Version
Description Indicates the version of the firmware that is currently installed on the
unit (reference only).
Value Range Firmware version ("nn.nnn" [n=0–9])

4.2.2 Network Status

This screen allows you to view the current network information of the unit, such as the MAC address, IP
address, Ethernet port status, etc.
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.

58 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.2.2 Network Status

4.2.2.1 Network Common

MAC Address
Description Indicates the MAC address of the unit (reference only).
Value Range Not applicable.

Ethernet Link Status

Description Indicates when either the Ethernet LAN port or the Ethernet PC port
is connected (reference only).
Value Range Connected

IP Address Mode
Description Indicates the current IP Address Mode.
Value Range • IPv4
• IPv6
• IPv4&IPv6

4.2.2.2 IPv4
Connection Mode
Description Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically
(DHCP) or manually (static) (reference only).
Value Range • DHCP
• Static

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 59

4.2.2 Network Status

IP Address
Description Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit (reference
only).
Value Range IP address

Subnet Mask
Description Indicates the specified subnet mask for the unit (reference only).
Value Range Subnet mask

Default Gateway
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the
network (reference only).

Note
• If the default gateway address is not specified, this field will be
left blank.
Value Range IP address of the default gateway

DNS1
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server
(reference only).

Note
• If the primary DNS server address is not specified, this field will
be left blank.
Value Range IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS2
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server
(reference only).

Note
• If the secondary DNS server address is not specified, this field
will be left blank.
Value Range IP address of the secondary DNS server

4.2.2.3 IPv6
Connection Mode
Description Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically
(DHCP) or manually (static) (reference only).
Value Range • DHCP
• Static
• Stateless Autoconfiguration

60 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.2.2 Network Status

IP Address
Description Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit (reference
only).
Value Range IP address

Prefix
Description Indicates the prefix for IPv6.
Value Range 0–128

Default Gateway
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the
network (reference only).

Note
• If the default gateway address is not specified, this field will be
left blank.
Value Range IP address of the default gateway

DNS1
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server
(reference only).

Note
• If the primary DNS server address is not specified, this field will
be left blank.
Value Range IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS2
Description Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server
(reference only).

Note
• If the secondary DNS server address is not specified, this field
will be left blank.
Value Range IP address of the secondary DNS server

4.2.2.4 VLAN
Setting Mode
Description Indicates the specified VLAN feature (reference only).
Value Range • Disable
• LLDP
• Manual

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 61

4.2.3 VoIP Status

LAN Port VLAN ID

Description Indicates the VLAN ID (reference only) for the IP Phone.
Value Range 0–4094

LAN Port VLAN Priority

Description Indicates the priority number (reference only) for the IP Phone.
Value Range 0–7

PC Port VLAN ID
Description Indicates the VLAN ID (reference only) for the PC.
Value Range 0–4094

PC Port VLAN Priority

Description Indicates the priority number (reference only) for the PC.
Value Range 0–7

4.2.3 VoIP Status

This screen allows you to view the current VoIP status of each line’s unit.
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.

4.2.3.1 VoIP Status

Line No.(1–16)
Description Indicates the line number to which a phone number is assigned
(reference only).
Value Range Line 1–Line 16

Phone Number
Description Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers (reference only).

Note
• The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been
leased or if the unit has not been configured.
Value Range Max. 32 digits

62 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3 Network

VoIP Status
Description Indicates the current VoIP status of each line (reference only).
Value Range • Registered: The unit has been registered to the SIP server, and the
line can be used.
• Registering: The unit is being registered to the SIP server, and the
line cannot be used.
• Blank: The line has not been leased, the unit has not been
configured yet, or a SIP authentication failure has occurred.

Note
• Immediately after starting up the unit, the phone numbers of
the lines will be displayed, but the status of the line may not be
displayed because the unit is still being registered to the SIP
server. To display the status, wait about 30 to 60 seconds, and
then click [Refresh] to obtain updated status information.

4.3 Network
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Network] tab.

4.3.1 Basic Network Settings

This screen allows you to change basic network settings such as whether to use a DHCP server, and the IP
address of the unit.

Note
• Changes to the settings on this screen are applied when the message "Complete" appears after
clicking [Save]. Because the IP address of the unit will probably be changed if you change these
settings, you will not be able to continue using the Web user interface. To continue configuring the unit
from the Web user interface, log in to the Web user interface again after confirming the newly
assigned IP address of the unit using the phone user interface. In addition, if the IP address of the PC
from which you try to access the Web user interface has been changed, close the Web port once by
selecting "Off" for "Embedded Web" on the unit (→ see Opening/Closing the Web Port in
1.1.6.3 Before Accessing the Web User Interface).

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 63

4.3.1 Basic Network Settings

4.3.1.1 IP Addressing Mode

IP Addressing Mode
Description Selects the IP addressing mode.
Value Range • IPv4
• IPv6
• IPv4&IPv6
Default Value IPv4
Configuration File Reference IP_ADDR_MODE

4.3.1.2 IPv4
Connection Mode
Description Selects the IP address setting mode for IPv4.
Value Range • DHCP
• Static
Default Value DHCP
Configuration File Reference CONNECTION_TYPE

DHCP Host Name

Description Specifies the host name to option12 in DHCPv4 or option15 in
DHCPv6.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [DHCP].
Value Range Max. 64 characters

Note
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit's model name.
Default Value {MODEL}
Configuration File Reference DHCP_HOST_NAME

IP Address
Description Specifies the IP address for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Not stored.

64 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.1 Basic Network Settings

Configuration File Reference STATIC_IP_ADDRESS

Subnet Mask
Description Specifies the subnet mask for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference STATIC_SUBNET

Default Gateway
Description Specifies the default gateway for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference STATIC_GATEWAY

Auto DNS via DHCP

Description Selects whether to enable or disable the DNS server obtained by
DHCPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [DHCP].
Value Range • Yes: Use DNS obtained by DHCPv4
• No: Not use (use static DNS)
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference DHCP_DNS_ENABLE

DNS1
Description Specifies the IP address of primary DNS server for IPv4.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference USER_DNS1_ADDR

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 65

4.3.1 Basic Network Settings

DNS2
Description Specifies the IP address of secondary DNS server for IPv4.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference USER_DNS2_ADDR

4.3.1.3 IPv6
Connection Mode
Description Selects the IP address setting mode for IPv6.
Value Range • DHCP
• Static
• Stateless Autoconfiguration
Default Value DHCP
Configuration File Reference CONNECTION_TYPE_IPV6

IP Address
Description Specifies the IP address for IPv6.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference STATIC_IP_ADDRESS_IPV6

Prefix
Description Specifies the prefix for IPv6.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range 0–128
Default Value 64
Configuration File Reference PREFIX_IPV6

66 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings

Default Gateway
Description Specifies the default gateway for IPv6.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference STATIC_GATEWAY_IPV6

Auto DNS via DHCP

Description Selects whether to enable or disable the DNS server obtained by
DHCPv6.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [DHCP].
Value Range • Yes: Use DNS obtained by DHCPv6
• No: Not use (use static DNS)
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6

DNS1
Description Specifies the IP address of primary DNS server for IPv6.
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6

DNS2
Description Specifies the IP address of secondary DNS server for IPv6.
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6

4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings

This screen allows you to change the connection mode of the Ethernet ports, LLDP and the VLAN settings.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 67

4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings

Note
• When you change the settings on this screen and click [Save], after the message "Complete" has
been displayed, the unit will restart automatically with the new settings applied. If a unit is on a call
when "Complete" has been displayed, the unit will restart after the unit returns to idle.

4.3.2.1 Link Speed/Duplex Mode

LAN Port
Description Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the
LAN port.
Value Range • Auto Negotiation
• 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Default Value Auto Negotiation
Configuration File Reference PHY_MODE_LAN

PC Port
Description Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the PC
port.
Value Range • Auto Negotiation
• 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Default Value Auto Negotiation

68 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings

Configuration File Reference PHY_MODE_PC

4.3.2.2 LLDP
Enable LLDP
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the LLDP-MED feature.

Note
• You should specify "Yes" for only one of "Enable LLDP", or
"Enable VLAN".
• If "Yes" is specified for two or more of the parameters above,
the settings are prioritized as follows: "Enable VLAN" >
"Enable LLDP". Therefore, if "Yes" is specified for both
"Enable VLAN" and "Enable LLDP", the VLAN-related
settings are used.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference LLDP_ENABLE

Packet Interval
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between sending each LLDP
frame.
Value Range 1–3600
Default Value 30
Configuration File Reference LLDP_INTERVAL

PC VLAN ID
Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC when LLDP is on.
Value Range 0–4094
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC

PC Priority
Description Specifies the VLAN Priority for the PC when LLDP is on.
Value Range 0–7
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 69

4.3.2 Ethernet Port Settings

4.3.2.3 VLAN
Enable VLAN
Description Selects whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP
communication securely.

Note
• You should specify "Yes" for only one of "Enable LLDP", or
"Enable VLAN".
• If "Yes" is specified for two or more of the parameters above,
the settings are prioritized as follows: "Enable VLAN" >
"Enable LLDP". Therefore, if "Yes" is specified for both
"Enable VLAN" and "Enable LLDP", the VLAN-related
settings are used.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference VLAN_ENABLE

IP Phone VLAN ID
Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the IP Phone.
Value Range 0–4094
Default Value 2
Configuration File Reference VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE

IP Phone Priority
Description Selects the priority for the IP Phone.
Value Range 0–7
Default Value 7
Configuration File Reference VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE

PC VLAN ID
Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.
Value Range 0–4094
Default Value 1
Configuration File Reference VLAN_ID_PC

PC Priority
Description Selects the priority for the PC.
Value Range 0–7
Default Value 0

70 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings

Configuration File Reference VLAN_PRI_PC

4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings

This screen allows you to change the HTTP client settings for the unit in order to access the HTTP server of
your phone system and download configuration files.

4.3.3.1 HTTP Client

HTTP Version
Description Selects which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP
communication.
Value Range • HTTP/1.0
• HTTP/1.1

Note
• For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you select [HTTP/
1.0]. However, if the HTTP server does not function well with
HTTP/1.0, try changing the setting [HTTP/1.1].
Default Value HTTP/1.0
Configuration File Reference HTTP_VER

HTTP User Agent

Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of
HTTP requests.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 71

4.3.3 HTTP Client Settings

Value Range Max. 64 characters

Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the firmware version of the unit.
Default Value Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Configuration File Reference HTTP_USER_AGENT

Authentication ID
Description Specifies the ID for the User account. If set, this name must be
entered to access the Web user interface at the User access level.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference HTTP_AUTH_ID

Authentication Password
Description Specifies the password for the User account. If set, this password
must be entered to access the Web user interface at the User access
level.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference HTTP_AUTH_PASS

4.3.3.2 Proxy Server

Enable Proxy
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the HTTP proxy feature.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference HTTP_PROXY_ENABLE

Proxy Server Address

Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.

72 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.4 STUN Settings

Configuration File Reference HTTP_PROXY_ADDR

Proxy Server Port

Description Specifies the port number of the proxy server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 8080
Configuration File Reference HTTP_PROXY_PORT

4.3.4 STUN Settings

This screen allows you to change the STUN Settings.

4.3.4.1 STUN
STUN: Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs

Server Address
Description Specifies the host name or IP address of the STUN server for the
CPE to send Binding Requests.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference STUN_SERV_ADDR

Port
Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server for the CPE to send
Binding Requests.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 3478
Configuration File Reference STUN_SERV_PORT

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 73

4.3.5 Multicast Paging Settings

Binding Interval
Description Specifies the interval of the sending binding request.
Value Range 60–86400
Default Value 300
Configuration File Reference STUN_INTVL

4.3.5 Multicast Paging Settings

This screen allows you to change the Multicast Paging Settings for each channel Group.

4.3.5.1 Multicast Paging

IPv4 Address (Group 1–5)
Description Specifies the address for multi-cast paging for each channel group.
{Priority: Group 5 > Group 4 > Group 3, Group2, Group1 (depending
on the configuration)}
Value Range 224.0.0.0–239.255.255.255
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference MPAGE_ADDRm

IPv6 Address (Group 1–5)

Description Specifies the IPv6 address for multi-cast paging for each channel
group. {Priority: Group 5 > Group 4 > Group 3, Group2, Group1
(depending on the configuration)}
Value Range FF00::/8
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference MPAGE_IPV6_ADDRm

74 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.6 LDAP Settings

Port (Group 1–5)

Description Specifies the port number for multi-cast paging for each channel
group.
Value Range 0–65535
0: Disable
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference MPAGE_PORTm

Priority (Group 1–3)

Description Selects the priority of the low priority channel group.
The priority of multi-cast paging group1-3 is lower than the talking.
Priority 4 is higher than Priority 5.
Value Range 4, 5
Default Value 5
Configuration File Reference MPAGE_PRIORITYm

Label (Group 1–5)

Description Specifies a label for each channel group.
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference MPAGE_LABELm

Enable Transmission (Group 1–5)

Description Selects the sending multi-cast paging.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference MPAGE_SEND_ENABLEm

4.3.6 LDAP Settings

This screen allows you to change the LDAP Settings.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 75

4.3.6 LDAP Settings

4.3.6.1 LDAP
Enable LDAP
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the LDAP service.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference LDAP_ENABLE

Server Address
Description Specifies the server host of LDAP.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference LDAP_SERVER

Port
Description Specifies the port of server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 389
Configuration File Reference LDAP_SERVER_PORT

User ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference LDAP_USERID

76 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.6 LDAP Settings

Password
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the LDAP
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference LDAP_PASSWORD

Max Hits
Description Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by
the LDAP server.
Value Range 20–500
Default Value 20
Configuration File Reference LDAP_MAXRECORD

Name Filter
Description Specifies the name filter which is the search criteria for name look up.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value (|(cn=%)(sn=%))
Configuration File Reference LDAP_NAME_FILTER

Number Filter
Description Specifies the number filter which is the search criteria for number look
up.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value (|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile =%)(homePhone =%))
Configuration File Reference LDAP_NUMB_FILTER

Name Attributes
Description Specifies the name attributes of each record which are to be returned
in the LDAP search result.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value cn,sn
Configuration File Reference LDAP_NAME_ATTRIBUTE

Number Attributes
Description Specifies the number attributes of each record which are to be
returned in the LDAP search result.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value telephoneNumber,mobile,homePhone
Configuration File Reference LDAP_NUMB_ATTRIBUTE

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 77

4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings

Distinguished Name(Base DN)

Description Specifies the entry information on the screen.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference LDAP_BASEDN

Enable DNS SRV lookup

Description Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain
names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference LDAP_DNSSRV_ENABLE

4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings

This screen allows you to change the Xtended Service Settings.

4.3.7.1 Xtended Service

Enable Xtended Service
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Xsi service.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XSI_ENABLE

Server Address
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the Xsi server.

78 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XSI_SERVER

Port
Description Specifies the port of the Xsi server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 80
Configuration File Reference XSI_SERVER_PORT

Protocol
Description Selects the type of the Xsi server.
Value Range HTTP, HTTPS
Default Value HTTP
Configuration File Reference XSI_SERVER_TYPE

SIP Credentials
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the XSI SIP Credentials feature.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XSI_SIP_CREDENTIALS_ENABLE

4.3.7.2 Xtended Service Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 79

4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings

User ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Xsi server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XSI_USERID_n

Password
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the Xsi
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XSI_PASSWORD_n

Enable Phonebook
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Xsi phonebook service.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n

Phonebook Type
Description Selects the type of Xsi phonebook.
Value Range • Group
• GroupCommon
• Enterprise
• EnterpriseCommon
• Personal
Default Value Group
Configuration File Reference XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_n

Enable Call Log

Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Xsi call log service.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_n

80 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.8 UC Settings

Enable Visual Voice Mail

Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Visual Voice Mail feature of
the selected line.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n

4.3.8 UC Settings
This screen allows you to change the UC Settings.

4.3.8.1 Presence Feature

Enable UC
Description Selects whether to enable the UC service.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference UC_ENABLE

Server Address
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the XMPP server.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 81

4.3.9 XML Application Settings

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMPP_SERVER

Local XMPP Port

Description Specifies the local XMPP port.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5222
Configuration File Reference XMPP_PORT

User ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the UC server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference UC_USERID

Password
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the UC
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference UC_PASSWORD

4.3.9 XML Application Settings

This screen allows you to configure the various URLs used with the XML application feature.

82 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.9 XML Application Settings

4.3.9.1 XML Application

Enable XMLAPP
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the XML application feature.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_ENABLE

User ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the XML
application server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_USERID

Password
Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the XML
application server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 83

4.3.9 XML Application Settings

Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_USERPASS

Local XML Port

Description Specifies the local HTTP port for XML application.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 6666
Configuration File Reference XML_HTTPD_PORT

Bootup URL
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit starts up, to check
for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_START_URL

Initial URL
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the application is started
from the unit’s menu, to check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL

Incoming Call URL

Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit receives a call, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL

Talking URL
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is on a call, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_TALKING_URL

Making Call URL

Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit makes a call, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.

84 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.9 XML Application Settings

Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL

Call Log URL

Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the call log is accessed, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL

Idling URL
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is idle, to check for
XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_IDLING_URL

Enable FF Key
Description Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the
telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_FFKEY_ENABLE

4.3.9.2 XML Phonebook

LDAP URL
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the phonebook is accessed,
to check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_URL

User ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 85

4.3.10 ACD Settings [Line1]–[Line16]

Password
Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the LDAP
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS

Max Hits
Description Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by
the LDAP server.
Value Range 20–500
Default Value 20
Configuration File Reference XMLAPP_LDAP_MAXRECORD

4.3.10 ACD Settings [Line1]–[Line16]

Enable ACD
Description Selects whether to enable the ACD.
Value Range • Yes
• No

86 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.3.11 Call Center Settings [Line1]–[Line16]

Default Value No
Configuration File Reference ACD_ENABLE_n

4.3.11 Call Center Settings [Line1]–[Line16]

Enable Call Center

Description Selects whether to add menu items for Call Center.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n

Disposition Code
Description Selects whether to enable the Disposition Code.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_n

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 87

4.4 System

Customer Originated Trace

Description Selects whether to enable the Customer Originated Trace.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_n

Hoteling Event
Description Selects whether to enable the Hoteling Event.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CC_HOTELING_EVENT_n

- User ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Hoteling
service.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference HOTELING_USERID_n

- Password
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the Hoteling
service.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference HOTELING_PASSWORD_n

Status Event
Description Selects whether to enable the Status Event.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_n

4.4 System
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [System] tab.

88 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.4.1 Language Settings

4.4.1 Language Settings

This screen allows you to select the language used for the Web user interface. The language setting is only
applicable when you log in to the Web user interface as User.

Note
• If you change the language while logged in to the Web user interface with the User account, the
language will be changed after the message "Complete" is displayed. If you are logged in with the
Administrator account, the language will be changed when a user logs in to the Web user interface as
User.
• The language used for the Web user interface for the Administrator account is always English.
• The language used for the unit remains unchanged even if the language for the Web user interface is
changed.

4.4.1.1 Selectable Language

IP Phone
Description Specifies the selectable language on the unit.
Up to 10 languages separated by commas can be registered. (e.g.,
"en,es,fr,de,it,nl,pt")

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 89

4.4.1 Language Settings

Value Range • en: English

• es: Spanish
• fr: French
• de: German
• it: Italian
• da: Danish
• nl: Dutch
• sv: Swedish
• fi: Finnish
• el: Greek
• hu: Hungarian
• pt: Portuguese
• pl: Polish
• sk: Slovakian
• cs: Czech
• sh: Croatian
• ru: Russian
• uk: Ukrainian
• tr: Turkish
• no: Norwegian
• ro: Romanian
• ct: Custom
• kk: Kazakh
• me: Montenegrin
Default Value Depends on the country or area.
Configuration File Reference AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE

Web Language
Description Specifies the selectable language on the Web.
Up to 10 languages separated by commas can be registered. (e.g.,
"en,es,fr,de,it,nl,pt")

90 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.4.1 Language Settings

Value Range • en: English

• es: Spanish
• fr: French
• de: German
• it: Italian
• nl: Dutch
• el: Greek
• hu: Hungarian
• pt: Portuguese
• pl: Polish
• sk: Slovakian
• cs: Czech
• sh: Croatian
• ru: Russian
• uk: Ukrainian
• tr: Turkish
• ro: Romanian
• ct: Custom
• kk: Kazakh
• me: Montenegrin
Default Value Depends on the country or area.
Configuration File Reference AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE_WEB

4.4.1.2 Language Settings

IP Phone
Description Selects the default language on the unit.
You can select a language from the languages set in IP Phone in
4.4.1.1 Selectable Language.
Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, da, nl, sv, fi, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, no, ro,
ct, kk, me → see IP Phone in 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Default Value en
Configuration File Reference DEFAULT_LANGUAGE

Web Language
Description Selects the default language on the web.
You can select a language from the languages set in Web Language
in 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language.
Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, nl, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, ro, ct, kk, me →
see Web Language in 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 91

4.4.2 User Password Settings

Default Value en
Configuration File Reference WEB_LANGUAGE

4.4.2 User Password Settings

This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the User account when logging in to
the Web user interface.

Note
• For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters,
which differ depending on the Web browser.
• After you change the user password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the
authentication dialog box appears. Three consecutive login failures will result in an error ("401
Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the
password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.

4.4.2.1 User Password

Current Password
Description Specifies the current password to use to authenticate the User
account when logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range 6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Default Value Not stored.

New Password
Description Specifies the new password to use to authenticate the User account
when logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range 6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)

Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.

92 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.4.3 Admin Password Settings

Default Value Not stored.

Note
• When a user logs in to the Web user interface for the first time,
after clicking OK on the authentication dialog box, the [Initial
User Password Settings] screen is displayed automatically to
make the user set a password.
Configuration File Reference USER_PASS

Confirm New Password

Description Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password]
for confirmation.
Value Range 6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Default Value Not stored.

4.4.3 Admin Password Settings

This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the Administrator account when
logging in to the Web user interface.

Note
• For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters,
which differ depending on the Web browser.
• After you change the administrator password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the
authentication dialog box appears. Three consecutive login failures will result in an error ("401
Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the
password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.

4.4.3.1 Admin Password

Current Password
Description Specifies the current password to use to authenticate the
Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 93

4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings

Value Range 6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,

>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Default Value adminpass

New Password
Description Specifies the new password to use to authenticate the Administrator
account when logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range 6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)

Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference ADMIN_PASS

Confirm New Password

Description Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password]
for confirmation.
Value Range 6–64 characters (except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =,
>, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, }, ~, \ and space)
Default Value Not stored.

4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings

This screen allows you to enable automatic clock adjustment using an NTP server and configure the
settings for DST (Daylight Saving Time), also known as Summer Time.

4.4.4.1 Synchronization (Synchronisation)

Server Address
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of NTP server.

94 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference NTP_ADDR

Synchronization Interval (Synchronisation Interval)

Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the
NTP server.
Value Range 10–86400
Default Value 43200
Configuration File Reference TIME_QUERY_INTVL

4.4.4.2 Time Zone

Time Zone
Description Selects your time zone.
Value Range GMT -12:00–GMT +13:00
Default Value GMT
Configuration File Reference TIME_ZONE

4.4.4.3 Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)

Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)
Description Selects whether to enable Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time).
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference DST_ENABLE

DST Offset (Summer Time Offset)

Description Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when
"DST_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range 0–720 (min)
Default Value 60
Configuration File Reference DST_OFFSET

4.4.4.4 Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer
Time)
Month
Description Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 95

4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings

Value Range • January

• February
• March
• April
• May
• June
• July
• August
• September
• October
• November
• December
Default Value March
Configuration File Reference DST_START_MONTH

Day of Week
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) starts. For
example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday].
Description Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range • First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
• Last
Default Value Second
Configuration File Reference DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY

Description Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range • Sunday
• Monday
• Tuesday
• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
Default Value Sunday
Configuration File Reference DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK

96 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.4.4 Time Adjust Settings

Time
Description Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Value Range 0–1439 (min)
Default Value 120
Configuration File Reference DST_START_TIME

4.4.4.5 End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer
Time)
Month
Description Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range • January
• February
• March
• April
• May
• June
• July
• August
• September
• October
• November
• December
Default Value October
Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_MONTH

Day of Week
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) ends. For
example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday].
Description Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range • First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
• Last
Default Value Second
Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 97

4.4.5 Advanced Settings

Description Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range • Sunday
• Monday
• Tuesday
• Wednesday
• Thursday
• Friday
• Saturday
Default Value Sunday
Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK

Time
Description Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Value Range 0–1439 (min)
Default Value 120
Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_TIME

4.4.5 Advanced Settings

This screen allows you to change the Soft Key function settings.

4.4.5.1 IP Phone
Enable Admin Ability
Description Selects whether to enable admin rights for the unit.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes

98 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.4.6 Import Display File

Configuration File Reference ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE

Enable IP Phone Lock

Description Selects whether to enable locking the unit.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference SYS_LOCK_ENABLE

Password for Unlocking

Description Specifies the password for unlocking the unit.
Value Range Null, 4 digits (0–9)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SYS_LOCK_PASSWORD

4.4.6 Import Display File

This screen allows you to specify the file of the screen saver to import.

4.4.6.1 Import Display File

File Name
Description Specifies the file of the screen saver to import.
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Default Value Not stored.

4.4.7 Wait Time

This screen allows you to specify the time to wait for the screen saver to display.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 99

4.4.8 Communication Camera

4.4.7.1 Wait Time

Wait Time
Description Specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for the screen saver to display.
Value Range 0, 10, 30, 60, 180, 300 (sec) [0:off]
Default Value 0

4.4.8 Communication Camera

This screen allows you to change the Communication Camera settings.

100 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5 VoIP

4.4.8.1 Communication Camera Settings [No. 1]–[No. 16]

Phone Number
Description Specifies the phone number of each Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference COMM_CAMERA_NUMBERx

Name
Description Specifies the name of each Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference COMM_CAMERA_NAMEx

Ringtone [ 1 - 32 ]
Description Specifies the ringtone of each Communication Camera.
Value Range 1–32 (10: doorbell)
Default Value 10
Configuration File Reference COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTINGx

4.5 VoIP
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [VoIP] tab.

4.5.1 SIP Settings

This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are common to all lines.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 101

4.5.1 SIP Settings

4.5.1.1 User Agent

User Agent
Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of
SIP messages.
Value Range Max. 64 characters

Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
firmware version of the unit.
• If "{sipver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the SIP software version of the unit.
Default Value Panasonic-{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Configuration File Reference SIP_USER_AGENT

4.5.1.2 NAT Identity

Enable Rport (RFC 3581)
Description Selects whether to add the 'rport' parameter to the top Via header
field value of requests generated.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference SIP_ADD_RPORT

Enable Port Punching for SIP

Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for SIP
packet.
Value Range 0, 10–300
0: Disable
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference PORT_PUNCH_INTVL

102 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Enable Port Punching for RTP

Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for RTP
packet.
Value Range 0, 10–300
0: Disable
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_PUNCH_INTVL

4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are specific to each line.

4.5.2.1 Basic
Phone Number
Description Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for
registration to the SIP registrar server.

Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number,
you should use the [SIP URI] setting.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference PHONE_NUMBER_n

Registrar Server Address

Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 103

4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n

Registrar Server Port

Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
registrar server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Configuration File Reference SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n

Proxy Server Address

Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n

Proxy Server Port

Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
proxy server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Configuration File Reference SIP_PRXY_PORT_n

Presence Server Address

Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n

Presence Server Port

Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
presence server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Configuration File Reference SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n

Outbound Proxy Server Address

Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters

104 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Default Value Not stored.

Configuration File Reference SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n

Outbound Proxy Server Port

Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
outbound proxy server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Configuration File Reference SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n

Service Domain
Description Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer/
service provider. The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that
comes after the "@" symbol.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n

Authentication ID
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_AUTHID_n

Authentication Password
Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_PASS_n

4.5.2.2 Advanced
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Description Specifies the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) level of
DiffServ applied to SIP packets.
Value Range 0–63
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference DSCP_SIP_n

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 105

4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Enable DNS SRV lookup

Description Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain
names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range • Yes
• No

Note
• If you select [Yes], the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for
a SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy
server, or SIP presence server. If you select [No], the unit will
not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server, SIP
proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence
server.
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n

SRV lookup Prefix for UDP

Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using UDP.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV lookup]
is set to [Yes].
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value _sip._udp.
Configuration File Reference SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n

SRV lookup Prefix for TCP

Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV lookup]
is set to [Yes].
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value _sip._tcp.
Configuration File Reference SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n

SRV lookup Prefix for TLS

Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TLS.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV lookup]
is set to [Yes].

106 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Value Range Max. 32 characters

Default Value _sips._tls.
Configuration File Reference SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_n

Local SIP Port

Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP
communication.
Value Range 1024–49151
Default Value 5060 (for Line 1)
5070 (for Line 2)
5080 (for Line 3)
5090 (for Line 4)
5100 (for Line 5)
5110 (for Line 6)
5120 (for Line 7)
5130 (for Line 8)
5140 (for Line 9)
5150 (for Line 10)
5160 (for Line 11)
5170 (for Line 12)
5180 (for Line 13)
5190 (for Line 14)
5200 (for Line 15)
5210 (for Line 16)
Configuration File Reference SIP_SRC_PORT_n

SIP URI
Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server, which
consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for
example, "sip:[email protected]", "2405551111_1".

Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number,
you should use this setting.
• In a SIP URI, the user part ("user" in the example above) can
contain up to 63 characters, and the host part ("example.com"
in the example above) can contain up to 316 characters.
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference SIP_URI_n

T1 Timer
Description Specifies the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions
of SIP messages.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 107

4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Value Range • 250

• 500
• 1000
• 2000
• 4000
Default Value 500
Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_T1_n

T2 Timer
Description Specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions
of SIP messages.
Value Range • 2
• 4
• 8
• 16
• 32
Default Value 4
Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_T2_n

REGISTER Expires Timer

Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER
request.
Value Range 1–4294967295
Default Value 3600
Configuration File Reference REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n

Enable Session Timer (RFC 4028)

Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before
terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is
received.
Value Range 0, 60–65535
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference SIP_SESSION_TIME_n

Session Timer Method

Description Selects the refreshing method of SIP sessions.
Value Range • INVITE
• UPDATE
• INVITE/UPDATE

108 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Default Value INVITE

Configuration File Reference SIP_SESSION_METHOD_n

Enable 100rel (RFC 3262)

Description Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported"
header of the INVITE message.
Value Range • Yes
• No

Note
• If you select [Yes], the Reliability of Provisional Responses
function will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to
the "Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message. If you
select [No], the option tag 100rel will not be used.
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n

Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter)

Description Selects whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers (registrar server,
proxy server, and presence server).
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n

Enable c=0.0.0.0 Hold (RFC 2543)

Description Selects whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this
line.
Value Range • Yes
• No

Note
• If you select [Yes], the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP
when sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call. If you
select [No], the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n

Transport Protocol
Description Selects which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 109

4.5.3 VoIP Settings

Value Range • UDP

• TCP
• TLS
Default Value UDP
Configuration File Reference SIP_TRANSPORT_n

TLS Mode
Description Select the secure SIP protocol.
Value Range • SIPS
• SIP-TLS
Default Value SIPS
Configuration File Reference SIP_TLS_MODE_n

4.5.3 VoIP Settings

This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are common to all lines.

110 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.3 VoIP Settings

4.5.3.1 RTP
RTP Packet Time
Description Selects the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP
packets.
Value Range • 20
• 30
• 40
• 60
Default Value 20
Configuration File Reference RTP_PTIME

Minimum RTP Port Number

Description Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP
packets.
Value Range 1024–59598 (even number only)
Default Value 16000
Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_MIN

Maximum RTP Port Number

Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP
packets.
Value Range 1424–59998 (even number only)
Default Value 20000
Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_MAX

Telephone-event Payload Type

Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.

Note
• This setting is available only when [DTMF Type] is set to
[RFC2833].
Value Range 96–127
Default Value 101
Configuration File Reference TELEVENT_PAYLOAD

4.5.3.2 Voice Quality Report

Server Address
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the collector server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 111

4.5.3 VoIP Settings

Default Value Not stored.

Configuration File Reference VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_ADDRESS

Port
Description Specifies the port of the collector server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Configuration File Reference VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_PORT

Enable PUBLISH
Description Selects the sending type of the VQ report using PUBLISH.
Value Range • Disable
• End of Session Report Using PUBLISH
• Interval report Using PUBLISH
• Alert Report Using PUBLISH
Default Value Disable
Configuration File Reference VQREPORT_SEND

Alert Report Trigger

Description Selects the trigger to notify the VQ report.
Value Range • Warning
• Critical
Default Value Warning
Configuration File Reference ALERT_REPORT_TRIGGER

Threshold MOS-LQ (Critical)

Description Specifies the criteria (critical) to send the VQ report when the MOSQ
occurs.
Value Range 0–40
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL

Threshold MOS-LQ (Warning)

Description Specifies the criteria (warning) to send the VQ report when the
MOSQ occurs.
Value Range 0–40
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_WARNING

112 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Threshold Delay (Critical)

Description Specifies the criteria (critical) to send the VQ report when a delay
occurs.
Value Range 0–2000
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_CRITICAL

Threshold Delay (Warning)

Description Specifies the criteria (warning) to send the VQ report when a delay
occurs.
Value Range 0–2000
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_WARNING

4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are specific to each line.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 113

4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

4.5.4.1 Basic
G.722 Enable
Description Selects whether to enable the G.722 codec for voice data
transmission.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n

G.722 Priority
Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G.722 codec.
Value Range 1–255
Default Value 1
Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n

114 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

PCMA Enable
Description Selects whether to enable the PCMA codec for voice data
transmission.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n

PCMA Priority
Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the PCMA codec.
Value Range 1–255
Default Value 1
Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n

G.729A Enable
Description Selects whether to enable the G.729A codec for voice data
transmission.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n

G.729A Priority
Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the G.729A codec.
Value Range 1–255
Default Value 1
Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n

PCMU Enable
Description Selects whether to enable the PCMU codec for voice data
transmission.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference CODEC_ENABLEx_n

PCMU Priority
Description Specifies the numerical order usage priority for the PCMU codec.
Value Range 1–255

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 115

4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Default Value 1
Configuration File Reference CODEC_PRIORITYx_n

DTMF Type
Description Selects the method for transmitting DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-
Frequency) tones.
Value Range • RFC2833
• Inband
• SIP INFO

Note
• RFC2833 refers to Outband DTMF.
• Inband referes to Inband DTMF.
Default Value RFC2833
Configuration File Reference DTMF_METHOD_n

4.5.4.2 Advanced
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets.
Value Range 0–63
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference DSCP_RTP_n

RTCP Packet QoS (DSCP)

Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTCP/RTCP-XR
packets.
Value Range 0–63
Default Value 0
Configuration File Reference DSCP_RTCP_n

Enable RTCP
Description Selects whether to enable or disable RTCP.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference RTCP_ENABLE_n

Enable RTCP-XR
Description Selects whether to enable or disable RTCP-XR.

116 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.5.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Value Range • Yes

• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference RTCPXR_ENABLE_n

RTCP&RTCP-XR Interval
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP/RTCP-XR packets.
Value Range 5–65535
Default Value 5
Configuration File Reference RTCP_INTVL_n

SRTP Mode
Description Selects the mode of SRTP feature.
Value Range • SRTP
• RTP/SRTP

Note
• SRTP: Use only SRTP for outgoing and incoming calls.
• RTP/SRTP: Use only RTP for outgoing calls, and RTP or
SRTP for incoming calls.
Default Value RTP/SRTP
Configuration File Reference SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_n

Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Conference

Description Selects whether to allow conferences where each participant can use
either SRTP or RTP.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_n

Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Transfer

Description Selects whether to allow call transfers between a user who is using
SRTP and a user who is using RTP.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 117

4.6 Telephone

4.6 Telephone
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Telephone] tab.

4.6.1 Call Control

This screen allows you to configure various call features that are common to all lines.

4.6.1.1 Call Control

Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server
Description Selects whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail
server.

Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE

Conference Server URI

Description Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of "sip:", a
user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,
"sip:[email protected]".

Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Value Range Max. 256 characters

118 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.1 Call Control

Default Value Not stored.

Configuration File Reference CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI

First-digit Timeout
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which the first digits of
a dial number must be dialed.
Value Range 1–600 (s)
Default Value 30
Configuration File Reference FIRSTDIGIT_TIM

Inter-digit Timeout
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent
digits of a dial number must be dialed.
Value Range 1–15 (s)
Default Value 5
Configuration File Reference INTDIGIT_TIM

Timer for Dial Plan

Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits when a "T"
or "t" has been entered in the dial plan.
Value Range 1–15 (s)
Default Value 5
Configuration File Reference MACRODIGIT_TIM

Enable # Key as delimiter

Description Selects whether the # key is treated as a regular dialed digit or a
delimiter, when dialed as or after the second digit.
Value Range • Yes: # is treated as the end of dialing delimiter.
• No: # is treated as a regular dialed digit.
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE

International Call Prefix

Description Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first "+" symbol
when the phone number for incoming international calls contains "+".
Value Range Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 119

4.6.1 Call Control

Country Calling Code

Description Specifies the country/area calling code to be used for comparative
purposes when dialing a number from the incoming call log that
contains a "+" symbol.
Value Range Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE

National Access Code

Description When dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a "+"
symbol and the country calling code matches, the country calling
code is removed and the national access code is added.
Value Range Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference NATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE

Default Line for Outgoing

Description Selects the line used to make an outgoing call when no line is
specified in the dialing operation.
Value Range • Line 1
• Line 2
• Line 3
• Line 4
• Line 5
• Line 6
• Line 7
• Line 8
• Line 9
• Line 10
• Line 11
• Line 12
• Line 13
• Line 14
• Line 15
• Line 16
Default Value Line 1
Configuration File Reference DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT

Call Park Number

Description Specifies the call parking number.

120 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.1 Call Control

Value Range 0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)

Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference NUM_PLAN_PARKING

Enable Call Park Key

Description Selects whether to display "Call Park" in the Call Parking Func menu.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE

Park Retrieve Number

Description Specifies the call park retrieve number.
Value Range 0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING

Directed Call Pickup

Description Specifies the feature number assigned to a BLF for performing call
pickup.
Value Range 0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT

4.6.1.2 Emergency Call Phone Numbers

1–5
Description Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls. A
user can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time
regardless of any restrictions imposed on the unit. A maximum of 5
phone numbers can be specified.
Value Range Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference EMERGENCY_CALLx

4.6.1.3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers

1–30
Description Specifies the phone numbers to reject incoming calls from. A
maximum of 30 phone numbers can be specified.
Value Range Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 121

4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Default Value Not stored.

Configuration File Reference CALL_REJECTIONx

4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16]

This screen allows you to configure various call features that are specific to each line.

4.6.2.1 Call Features

Display Name
Description Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone
when you make a call.
Value Range Max. 24 characters

Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference DISPLAY_NAME_n

Voice Mail Access Number

Description Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.

Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference VM_NUMBER_n

122 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Enable Anonymous Call

Description Selects whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number
to the called party.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n

Enable Block Anonymous Call

Description Selects whether to accept or reject the incoming call without the
called party’s phone number.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n

Enable Do Not Disturb

Description Selects whether to reject the all incoming calls.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No

Enable Call Waiting

Description Selects whether to enable Call Waiting.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference CW_ENABLE_n

Enable Call Forwarding Always

Description Selects whether to forward all incoming calls to a specified
destination.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No

Forwarding Number (Always)

Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward all incoming
calls to.
Value Range Max. 32 characters

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 123

4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Default Value Not stored.

Enable Call Forwarding Busy

Description Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination
when the line is in use.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No

Forwarding Number (Busy)

Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to
when the line is in use.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Not stored.

Enable Call Forwarding No Answer

Description Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination
when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of
times.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No

Forwarding Number (No Answer)

Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to
when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of
times.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Not stored.

Ring Counts (No Answer)

Description Specifies the number of times that an incoming call rings until the call
is forwarded.
Value Range 0, 2–20
Default Value 3

Enable Shared Call

Description Selects whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server,
which is used to share one line among the units.

Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.

124 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Value Range • Yes

• No

Note
• If you select [Yes], the SIP server will control the line by using
a shared-call signaling method. If you select [No], the SIP
server will control the line by using a standard signaling
method.
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_n

Enable Key Synchronization (Enable Key Synchronisation)

Description Selects whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
settings.

Note
• Even if you select [Yes], this feature may not function properly
if your phone system does not support it. Before you configure
this setting, consult your phone system dealer/service provider.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n

Enable Call Park Notification

Description Selects whether to respond to call park notifications from the server.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n

Enable Click to Call

Description Selects whether to enable Click to Dial/Answer/Hold functions.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CLICKTO_ENABLE_n

Enable Executive Setting

Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Executive Call Filtering
feature of the selected line.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 125

4.6.2 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 16]

Value Range • Yes

• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_n

Enable Assistant Setting

Description Selects whether to enable the Executive-Assistant Call Filtering
feature and the Executive-Assistant Divert feature of the selected
line.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_n

MoH Server URI

Description Specifies MoH server URI for each line.
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference MOH_SERVER_URI_n

Resource List URI

Description Specifies the URI for the resource list, which consists of "sip:", a user
part, the "@" symbol, and a host part.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference RESOURCELIST_URI_n

4.6.2.2 Dial Plan

Dial Plan (max 1000 columns)
Description Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control
which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making
a call. For details, see 6.2 Dial Plan.
Value Range Max. 1000 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference DIAL_PLAN_n

Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match

Description Selects whether to make a call even if the dialed number does not
match any of the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan].

126 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.3 Hotline Settings

Value Range • Yes

• No

Note
• If you select [Yes], calls will be made even if the dialed number
does not match the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e.,
dial plan filtering is disabled). If you select [No], calls will not be
made if the dialed number does not match one of the dial
formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e., dial plan filtering is
enabled).
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n

4.6.3 Hotline Settings

4.6.3.1 Hotline
Enable
Description Selects whether to enable or disable the Hot line feature.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 127

4.6.4 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24)

Value Range • Yes

• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference HOTLINE_ENABLE

Hotline Number
Description Specifies the Hot line number.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference HOTLINE_NUMBER

Hotline Delay
Description Specifies a time after off hook for Hot line.
Value Range 0–10 (s)
Default Value 2
Configuration File Reference HOTLINE_TIM

4.6.4 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24)

This screen allows you to configure various features for each flexible key.

128 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.4 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24)

4.6.4.1 Flexible Key Settings

Type
Description Selects the feature to be assigned to each flexible key.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 129

4.6.5 Tone Settings

Value Range • One Touch Dial

• BLF
• Line
• ACD
• Wrap Up
• Line Status
• Call Forward
• Phonebook
• Call History
• Simultaneous Ring
• Hoteling (Hospitality)
• Transfer
• Blind Transfer
• Conference
• Directed Call Pickup
• Call Park
• Call Park Retrieve
• Network Camera
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx

Parameter
Description Specifies the necessary values for the features assigned to flexible
keys.
Value Range Max. 35 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx

Label Name
Description Specifies the message to be displayed on the screen when the
flexible key is pressed.
Value Range Max. 20 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx

4.6.5 Tone Settings

This screen allows you to configure the dual-tone frequencies and ringtone patterns of each tone.

130 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.5 Tone Settings

4.6.5.1 Dial Tone

Tone Frequencies
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of dial tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)

Note
• If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a
mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.
Default Value 350,440
Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE1_FRQ

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 131

4.6.5 Tone Settings

Tone Timings
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of dial tones using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• The unit will not play the tone for the duration of the first value,
play it for the duration of the second value, stop it for the
duration of the third value, play it again for the duration of the
fourth value, and so on. The whole sequence will then repeat.
For example, if the value for this setting is "100,100,100,0", the
unit will not play the tone for 100 ms, play it for 100 ms, stop it
for 100 ms, and then play it continuously.
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Infinite time)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,0
Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE1_TIMING

4.6.5.2 Busy Tone

Tone Frequencies
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)

Note
• If the value for this setting is "480,620", the unit will use a
mixed signal of a 480 Hz tone and a 620 Hz tone.
Default Value 480,620
Configuration File Reference BUSY_TONE_FRQ

Tone Timings
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Infinite time)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,500,440
Configuration File Reference BUSY_TONE_TIMING

132 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.5 Tone Settings

4.6.5.3 Ringing Tone

Tone Frequencies
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using
2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)

Note
• If the value for this setting is "440,480", the unit will use a
mixed signal of a 440 Hz tone and a 480 Hz tone.
Default Value 440,480
Configuration File Reference RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ

Tone Timings
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using up to
10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Infinite time)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,2000,3940
Configuration File Reference RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING

4.6.5.4 Stutter Tone

Tone Frequencies
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of stutter dial tones to
notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated
by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)

Note
• If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a
mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.
Default Value 350,440
Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE4_FRQ

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 133

4.6.5 Tone Settings

Tone Timings
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of stutter dial tones to notify
that a voice mail is waiting, using up to 22 whole numbers (off 1, on 1,
off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 560 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Infinite time)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 560,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,10
0,100,100,100,100,100,0
Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE4_TIMING

4.6.5.5 Reorder Tone

Tone Frequencies
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)

Note
• If the value for this setting is "480,620", the unit will use a
mixed signal of a 480 Hz tone and a 620 Hz tone.
Default Value 480,620
Configuration File Reference REORDER_TONE_FRQ

Tone Timings
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value 60,250,190

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Configuration File Reference REORDER_TONE_TIMING

134 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.6 Import Phonebook

4.6.6 Import Phonebook

This screen allows you to import phonebook data from a PC to the specified unit. For details, see
6.1.1 Import/Export Operation.

Note
• If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported
entry, the imported entry is not added as a new entry.
• When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is
displayed, and the screen is periodically reloaded. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might
not reload automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order
for the import operation to function properly.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 135

4.6.7 Export Phonebook

4.6.6.1 Import Phonebook

File Name
Description Specifies the path of the TSV (Tab-separated Value) file to import
from the PC.
Value Range No limitation

Note
• There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is
recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used:
longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in
an internal error.
Default Value Not stored.

4.6.7 Export Phonebook

This screen allows you to save the phonebook data stored in the unit as a TSV file on a PC. For details, see
6.1.1 Import/Export Operation.

Note
• When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is
displayed, and the screen is periodically reloaded. Click the text "HERE" in the message to display
the [Export Phonebook] screen again. If you do not, the "Now Processing File Data" screen remains
displayed even if the export is complete. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not
reload automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for
the export operation to function properly.
• Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked at the time
of export. The security warning window may be displayed on another screen even if the Pop-up
Blocker settings are set to enable, and the file may not be exported successfully. In this case, try the
export operation again or disable the Pop-up Blocker feature of your Web browser.

136 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.8 Video Call Settings

4.6.7.1 Export Phonebook

Export Phonebook
Click [Export] button to export the phonebook from this unit.

4.6.8 Video Call Settings

This screen allows you to change the Video Call settings.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 137

4.6.8 Video Call Settings

4.6.8.1 Default Call Mode

Default Call Mode
Description Selects the default call type when you make a call by going off hook,
etc.
Value Range • Voice
• Video
Default Value Voice
Configuration File Reference DEFAULT_CALL_MODE

138 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.8 Video Call Settings

4.6.8.2 Screen Mode

Screen Mode
Description Selects the mode for the video screen.
Value Range • Normal
• Split
Default Value Normal
Configuration File Reference VIDEO_SCREEN_MODE

4.6.8.3 Send Image

Send Image at Start
Description Selects whether the video is automatically sent when you start a
video call.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference VIDEO_SEND_IMAGE_ENABLE

4.6.8.4 Rate Settings

Bit Rate
Description Selects the bit rate for the video when you make a video call.
Value Range • 128
• 256
• 384
• 512
• 768
• 1024
• 2048
Default Value 2048
Configuration File Reference VIDEO_BIT_RATE

Bit Rate Use

Description Selects whether the specified bit rate is treated as the maximum bit
rate or a fixed bit rate.
Value Range • Maximum
• Fixed
Default Value Maximum
Configuration File Reference VIDEO_BIT_RATE_USE

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 139

4.6.9 DSS Console

Frame Rate
Description Selects the frame rate for the video when you make a video call.
Value Range • 15
• 30
Default Value 30
Configuration File Reference VIDEO_FRAME_RATE

Image Size
Description Selects the size for video images when you make a video call.
Value Range • QCIF
• QVGA
• CIF
• HVGAW
• VGA
Default Value HVGAW
Configuration File Reference VIDEO_IMAGE_SIZE

4.6.9 DSS Console

This screen allows you to configure various features for each DSS console key. Each DSS console supports
40 keys. DSS console 1 uses keys 1-40, DSS console 2 uses keys 41-80, etc.

140 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.6.9 DSS Console

4.6.9.1 DSS 1-5 Key (No. 1–200)

Type
Description Selects the feature to be assigned to each DSS console key.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 141

4.7 Maintenance

Value Range • One Touch Dial

• BLF
• Line
• ACD
• Wrap Up
• Line Status
• Call Forward
• Phonebook
• Call History
• Simultaneous Ring
• Hoteling (Hospitality)
• Transfer
• Blind Transfer
• Conference
• Directed Call Pickup
• Call Park
• Call Park Retrieve
• Network Camera
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx

Parameter
Description Specifies the necessary values for the features assigned to DSS
console keys.
Value Range Max. 35 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx

Label Name
Description Specifies the message to be displayed on the screen when the DSS
console key is pressed.
Value Range Max. 20 characters
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference DSS_BUTTON_LABELx

4.7 Maintenance
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Maintenance] tab.

142 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.7.1 Provisioning Maintenance

4.7.1 Provisioning Maintenance

This screen allows you to change the provisioning setup to download the configuration files from the
provisioning server of your phone system.

4.7.1.1 Provisioning Maintenance

Standard File URL
Description Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used
when every unit needs different settings.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH

Product File URL

Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used
when all units with the same model number need the same settings.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 143

4.7.1 Provisioning Maintenance

Master File URL

Description Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used
when all units need the same settings.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH

Cyclic Auto Resync

Description Selects whether the unit periodically checks for updates of
configuration files.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value No
Configuration File Reference CFG_CYCLIC

Resync Interval
Description Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for
updates of the configuration files.
Value Range 1–40320
Default Value 10080
Configuration File Reference CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL

Time Resync
Description Specifies the time (hour:minute) that the unit checks for updates of
configuration files.
Value Range 00:00–23:59
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference CFG_RESYNC_TIME

Header Value for Resync Event

Description Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to
the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the
provisioning server.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
Default Value check-sync
Configuration File Reference CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP

144 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance

4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance

This screen allows you to perform firmware updates automatically.

4.7.2.1 Firmware Maintenance

Enable Firmware Update
Description Selects whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a
newer version of firmware.

Note
• Firmware updates using TR-069 can be performed regardless
of this setting.
Value Range • Yes
• No
Default Value Yes
Configuration File Reference FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE

Firmware File URL

Description Specifies the URI where the firmware file is stored.

Note
• This setting is available only when [Enable Firmware Update]
is set to [Yes].
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the value specified in [Firmware Version]. For details about
the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address Formats.
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference FIRM_FILE_PATH

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 145

4.7.3 Export Logging File

Firmware Version
Description Specifies the new firmware version of the unit.
Value Range 6 characters
xx.xxx [x=0–9]
Default Value Not stored.
Configuration File Reference FIRM_VERSION

4.7.3 Export Logging File

This screen allows you to specify the Logging File to export when logging.

4.7.3.1 Export Logging File

Logging File Type
Description Selects the Logging File Type setting.
Value Range • Power Down
• Event
• SIP Packet

Note
• The line break code for the log file is <LF>.
• If a file is exported when Power Down is selected, the saved
file is power.log.
• If a file is exported when Event is selected, the saved file is
event_log.txt.
• If a file is exported when SIP Packet is selected, the saved file
is sip_trace_log.txt.
Default Value Power Down

146 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 4.7.4 Reset to Defaults

4.7.4 Reset to Defaults

This screen allows you to reset the carrier default settings made through the Web user interface to their
default values by clicking [Reset to Carrier Defaults]. After you click this button, a dialog box is displayed,
asking whether you want to reset the settings. Click OK to reset, or Cancel not to.

Notice
• After resetting the settings, the unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user
interface, or on calls.

Note
• You can specify carrier default using configuration parameter extensions. Those parameters will be
reset to the specified carrier default values (see Parameter Extensions).

4.7.5 Restart
This screen allows you to restart the unit by clicking [Restart]. After you click this button, a dialog box is
displayed, asking whether you want to restart the unit. Click OK to perform a restart, or Cancel not to.

Notice
• The unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface, or on calls.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 147

4.7.5 Restart

148 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 5
Configuration File Programming

This section provides information about the

configuration parameters used in the configuration files.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 149

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

The following tables show all the parameters that can be programmed using configuration file programming.
For details about each parameter, see the reference pages listed.
For details about configuration file specifications, see 2.4 Configuration File Specifications.

System Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
FACTORY_RESET_ENABLE page 170
BUTTON_LOCATION_SETTING page 170
SYS_HOME_MENU_ICONx page 170
FWD_DND_MENU_ENABLE page 171
BLOCK_ANONY_MENU_ENABLE page 171
ANONY_CALL_MENU_ENABLE page 171
TIME_ZONE_SET_ENABLE page 172
DISPLAY_CALL_KEY_ENABLE page 172

Basic Network Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
IP_ADDR_MODE*1 page 172
CONNECTION_TYPE *1
page 172
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS*1 page 172
STATIC_SUBNET*1 page 173
STATIC_GATEWAY*1 page 173
USER_DNS1_ADDR*1 page 173
USER_DNS2_ADDR*1 page 174
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE*1 page 174
DHCP_HOST_NAME *2
page 174
DHCP_VENDOR_CLASS page 175
CONNECTION_TYPE_IPV6*1 page 175
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS_IPV6 *1
page 175
PREFIX_IPV6*1 page 175
STATIC_GATEWAY_IPV6*1 page 176
USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6*1 page 176
USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6*1 page 176
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6*1 page 176

150 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Ethernet Port Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
PHY_MODE_LAN*1 page 176
PHY_MODE_PC *1
page 177
VLAN_ENABLE*1 page 177
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE*1 page 177
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE *1
page 178
VLAN_ID_PC*1 page 178
VLAN_PRI_PC*1 page 178
LLDP_ENABLE*1 page 178
LLDP_INTERVAL *2
page 179
LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC*1 page 179
LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC*1 page 179

Pre-Provisioning Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
SIPPNP_PROV_ENABLE page 179
OPTION66_ENABLE page 179
OPTION159_PROV_ENABLE page 180
OPTION160_PROV_ENABLE page 180
DHCPV6_OPTION17_PROV_ENABLE page 180

Provisioning Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH*2 page 180
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH*2 page 181
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH*2 page 181
CFG_CYCLIC*2 page 182
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL*2 page 182
CFG_RESYNC_TIME *2
page 182
CFG_RTRY_INTVL page 182
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP*2 page 183
CFG_RESYNC_ACTION page 183
CFG_FILE_KEY2 page 183
CFG_FILE_KEY3 page 183
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH page 184

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 151

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH page 184
CFG_CLIENT_CERT_PATH page 184
CFG_PKEY_PATH page 184
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY page 185
CFG_RESYNC_DURATION page 185

Firmware Update Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE*2 page 185
FIRM_FILE_PATH*2 page 186
FIRM_VERSION page 186
FWDL_RANDOM_DURATION page 186

HTTP Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
HTTP_VER*2 page 187
HTTP_USER_AGENT *2
page 187
HTTP_AUTH_ID*1 page 187
HTTP_AUTH_PASS*1 page 188
HTTP_PROXY_ENABLE*2 page 188
HTTP_PROXY_ADDR*2 page 188
HTTP_PROXY_PORT*2 page 188
HTTP_PROXY_ID page 188
HTTP_PROXY_PASS page 188

HTTPD/WEB Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
HTTPD_LISTEN_PORT page 189
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO page 189
HTTPD_PORTCLOSE_TM page 189
USER_ID page 189
USER_PASS *2
page 190
ADMIN_ID page 190
ADMIN_PASS *2
page 190

152 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

TR-069 Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
ACS_URL page 191
ACS_USER_ID page 191
ACS_PASS page 191
PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE page 191
PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL page 192
PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME page 192
CON_REQ_USER_ID page 192
CON_REQ_PASS page 193
ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE page 193
ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR page 193
ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT page 193
ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID page 194
ANNEX_G_STUN_PASS page 194
ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE page 194
ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE page 195
UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT page 195
DEVICE_PROVISIONING_CODE page 195

XML Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
XMLAPP_ENABLE*2 page 195
XMLAPP_USERID*2 page 195
XMLAPP_USERPASS*2 page 196
XMLAPP_LDAP_URL*2 page 196
XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID*2 page 196
XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS *2
page 196
XMLAPP_NPB_SEARCH_TIMER page 196
XMLAPP_LDAP_MAXRECORD*2 page 197
XML_HTTPD_PORT *2
page 197
XML_ERROR_INFORMATION page 197
XMLAPP_START_URL*2 page 197
XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL *2
page 197
XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL*2 page 198
XMLAPP_TALKING_URL*2 page 198

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 153

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL*2 page 198
XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL*2 page 198
XMLAPP_IDLING_URL *2
page 198
XMLAPP_FFKEY_ENABLE*2 page 199
XMLAPP_STATUSBAR_ENABLE page 199
XMLAPP_URL_FLEX_BUTTONx page 199
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_NAMEx page 199
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_URLx page 199
SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_ICONx page 200

XSI Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
XSI_ENABLE*2 page 200
XSI_SERVER *2
page 200
XSI_SERVER_TYPE*2 page 201
XSI_SERVER_PORT*2 page 201
XSI_USERID_n*1 page 201
XSI_PASSWORD_n*1 page 201
XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n*2 page 201
XSI_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL page 202
XSI_PHONEBOOK_RESYNC_DURATION page 202
XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_n*2 page 202
XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_n *2
page 202
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n*2 page 203
XSI_SIP_CREDENTIALS_ENABLE*2 page 203
BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE page 203
BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_n page 203
BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_n page 204
BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_n page 204
BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_n page 204
BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_n page 204

XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
UC_ENABLE *2
page 205

154 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

UC_USERID*1 page 205
UC_PASSWORD*1 page 205
XMPP_SERVER *2
page 205
XMPP_PORT*2 page 205
XMPP_TLS_VERIFY page 206
XMPP_ROOT_CERT_PATH page 206
XMPP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH page 206
XMPP_PKEY_PATH page 206
UC_DNSSRV_ENA page 207
UC_TCP_SRV_PREFIX page 207
UC_USERID_CASE_SENSITIVE page 207

LDAP Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
LDAP_ENABLE*2 page 207
LDAP_DNSSRV_ENABLE *2
page 207
LDAP_SERVER*2 page 208
LDAP_SERVER_PORT*2 page 208
LDAP_MAXRECORD*2 page 208
LDAP_NUMB_SEARCH_TIMER page 208
LDAP_NAME_SEARCH_TIMER page 208
LDAP_USERID *2
page 208
LDAP_PASSWORD*2 page 209
LDAP_NAME_FILTER*2 page 209
LDAP_NUMB_FILTER*2 page 209
LDAP_NAME_ATTRIBUTE*2 page 209
LDAP_NUMB_ATTRIBUTE*2 page 209
LDAP_BASEDN*2 page 210
LDAP_SSL_VERIFY page 210
LDAP_ROOT_CERT_PATH page 210
LDAP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH page 210
LDAP_PKEY_PATH page 210
LDAP_DISPLAY_FORMAT page 211

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 155

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Call Center Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n*2 page 211
ACD_ENABLE_n *2
page 211
ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_n page 211
ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_n page 212
CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_n*2 page 212
CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_n*2 page 212
CC_HOTELING_EVENT_n*2 page 212
HOTELING_USERID_n*2 page 213
HOTELING_PASSWORD_n*2 page 213
CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_n*2 page 213

SNMP Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
SNMP_ENABLE page 214
SNMP_TRUST_IP page 214
SNMP_TRUST_PORT page 214
SNMP_RO_COMMUNITY_STRING page 214
SNMP_SECURITY_TYPE page 214
SNMP_SECURITY_USER page 214
SNMP_AUTH_TYPE page 215
SNMP_AUTH_PASSWORD page 215
SNMP_ENCRYPT_TYPE page 215
SNMP_ENCRYPT_PASSWORD page 215

Multicast Paging Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
MPAGE_ADDRm *2
page 215
MPAGE_IPV6_ADDRm*2 page 216
MPAGE_PORTm*2 page 216
MPAGE_PRIORITYm *2
page 216
MPAGE_LABELm*2 page 216
MPAGE_SEND_ENABLEm*2 page 217
MPAGE_CODEC page 217
MPAGE_SP_VOL_EMERGENCY page 217

156 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

MPAGE_SP_VOL_PRIORITY page 217
MPAGE_DND_ENABLE page 217
MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE page 218

NTP Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
NTP_ADDR*2 page 218
TIME_SYNC_INTVL page 218
TIME_QUERY_INTVL*2 page 218

Time Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX page 218
TIME_ZONE*2 page 219
DST_ENABLE *2
page 220
DST_OFFSET*2 page 220
DST_START_MONTH*2 page 221
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY*2 page 221
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK*2 page 221
DST_START_TIME*2 page 222
DST_STOP_MONTH*2 page 222
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY *2
page 222
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK*2 page 223
DST_STOP_TIME*2 page 223

Network Phonebook (Common)

Parameter Name Ref.
ONLY_NPB_ENABLE page 224
NETWORK_SEARCH_ENABLE page 224

Language Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE *2
page 224
DEFAULT_LANGUAGE*2 page 224
LANGUAGE_PATHx page 225
LANGUAGE_VERx page 225

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 157

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE_WEB*2 page 225
WEB_LANGUAGE*2 page 225
WEB_LANGUAGE_PATHx page 226
WEB_LANGUAGE_VERx page 226

NAT Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
STUN_SERV_ADDR*2 page 226
STUN_SERV_PORT *2
page 226
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR page 226
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT page 227
STUN_INTVL *2
page 227
SIP_ADD_RPORT*2 page 227
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL*2 page 227
RTP_PORT_PUNCH_INTVL *2
page 227
EXTERNAL_RTP_PORTx page 228

SIP Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
SIP_USER_AGENT*2 page 228
PHONE_NUMBER_n*2 page 228
SIP_URI_n *2
page 229
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n*2 page 229
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n*2 page 229
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n*2 page 230
SIP_PRXY_PORT_n*2 page 230
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n*2 page 230
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n*2 page 230
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n *2
page 231
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n*2 page 231
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n*2 page 231
SIP_AUTHID_n*2 page 231
SIP_PASS_n*2 page 231
SIP_SRC_PORT_n*2 page 232
DSCP_SIP_n*2 page 232

158 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n*2 page 233
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n*2 page 233
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n *2
page 233
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n*2 page 234
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n page 234
REG_RTX_INTVL_n page 234
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_n page 234
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_n page 235
SIP_SESSION_TIME_n*2 page 235
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_n*2 page 235
SIP_TIMER_T1_n*2 page 235
SIP_TIMER_T2_n*2 page 236
SIP_TIMER_T4_n page 236
SIP_TIMER_B_n page 236
SIP_TIMER_D_n page 237
SIP_TIMER_F_n page 237
SIP_TIMER_H_n page 237
SIP_TIMER_J_n page 237
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n*2 page 238
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n page 238
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n page 238
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_n page 238
SUB_RTX_INTVL_n page 239
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_n page 239
SIP_PRIVACY_n page 239
ADD_USER_PHONE_n page 239
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_n page 240
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_n page 240
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_n page 240
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n*2 page 241
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n page 241
SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_n page 241
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_n page 242
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE page 242
SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n page 242

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 159

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n page 242
SIP_FOVR_MAX_n page 243
SIP_FOVR_MODE_n page 243
SIP_FOVR_DURATION_n page 243
SIP_ADD_ROUTE_n page 243
SIP_REQURI_PORT_n page 244
ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_n page 244
ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n page 244
SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_n page 245
TRANSFER_RECALL_TIM page 245
SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_n page 245
MAX_BREADTH_n page 245
MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_n page 246
RFC5626_KEEPALIVE_ENABLE_n page 246
RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_n page 246
SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_n page 246
SIP_FORK_MODE_n page 247
AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_n page 247
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n *2
page 247
SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_n page 247
SDP_USER_ID_n page 248
TELEVENT_PAYLOAD*2 page 248
HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n page 248
KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_n page 249
RFC3327_SUPPORT_PATH page 249
RFC4244_SUPPORT_HISTORY page 249
RFC3319_SUPPORT_JOIN page 249
RFC6947_DRAFT08_ALTC page 249
RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_n page 250
ESCAPECODE_CONVERSION page 250
SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_n page 250
SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_n page 250

160 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

SIP-TLS Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
SIP_TRANSPORT_n*2 page 251
SIP_TLS_MODE_n *2
page 251
SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_n page 251
SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_n*2 page 251
SIP_TLS_VERIFY_n page 252
SIP_TLS_ROOT_CERT_PATH page 252
SIP_TLS_CLIENT_CERT_PATH page 252
SIP_TLS_PKEY_PATH page 252
SIP_TLS_RANDOM_PORT page 253

CODEC Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
CODEC_G729_PARAM_n page 253
CODEC_ENABLEx_n*2 page 253
CODEC_PRIORITYx_n *2
page 254
CODEC_G711_REQ page 254

DTMF Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
DTMF_METHOD_n*2 page 254
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL page 255
INBANDDTMF_VOL page 255
DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN page 255
DTMF_INTDIGIT_TIM page 255

RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
DSCP_RTP_n *2
page 256
DSCP_RTCP_n*2 page 256
MAX_DELAY_n page 256
MIN_DELAY_n page 256
NOM_DELAY_n page 257
RTP_PORT_MIN *2
page 257
RTP_PORT_MAX*2 page 257
RTP_PTIME*2 page 257

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 161

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

RTP_TARGET_CHECK page 258
RTCP_ENABLE_n *2
page 258
RTCP_INTVL_n*2 page 258
RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_n page 258
RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_n page 259
RTCPXR_ENABLE_n*2 page 259

SRTP Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_n*2 page 259
SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_n*2 page 260
SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n *2
page 260
SRTP_HELD_CALL_RTP_ENABLE page 260

VQ Report by PUBLISH
Parameter Name Ref.
VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_ADDRESS*2 page 261
VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_PORT*2 page 261
VQREPORT_SEND *2
page 261
ALERT_REPORT_TRIGGER*2 page 261
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL*2 page 262
ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_WARNING*2 page 262
ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_CRITICAL*2 page 262
ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_WARNING*2 page 262
VQREPORT_SIGNAL_COMPRESSION page 262

uaCSTA Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
UACSTA_ENABLE_n page 263
UACSTA_UNIQUE_ID page 263
CSTA_PORT page 263
CSTA_PRXY_ADDR page 263
CSTA_PRXY_PORT page 263
CSTA_RGSTR_ADDR page 263
CSTA_RGSTR_PORT page 264
CSTA_REG_EXPIRE_TIME page 264

162 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

CSTA_TRANSPORT page 264
CSTA_RGSTR_AUTHID page 264
CSTA_RGSTR_PASS page 264

Telephone Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
POWER_ON_DISPLAY_LOGO_PATH page 265
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM *2
page 265
INTDIGIT_TIM*2 page 265
POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE*2 page 265
RINGTONE_SETTING_n*3 page 266
DISPLAY_NAME_REPLACE page 266
NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT page 266
NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT page 266
FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE page 266
FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE page 267
NUM_PLAN_PARKING*2 page 267
CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE*2 page 267
NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING*2 page 267
HOLD_RECALL_TIM page 267
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION page 268
ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE page 268
ONHOOK_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE page 268
BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE page 268
SYS_LOCK_ENABLE*2 page 268
SYS_LOCK_PASSWORD*2 page 269
PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE page 269
NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT*2 page 269
DISP_NUM_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE page 269
WALLPAPER_WAIT_TIME*1 page 269
CNIP_FROM_ENABLE page 270
IDLE_DISPLAY_TYPE*3 page 270
BLF_DISPLAY_OFF_OUTGOING page 270
SPLIT_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE page 270

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 163

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Flexible Key Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx*2 page 271
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx *2
page 271
FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx*2 page 272
FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx page 272
LONG_PRESS_KEY_SETTING_ENABLE page 272

DSS Key Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx *2
page 273
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx*2 page 273
DSS_BUTTON_LABELx*2 page 274
DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx page 274

Tone Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_FRQ page 274
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_GAIN page 274
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_RPT page 274
OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_TIMING page 275
CONFIRMATION_TONE5_FRQ page 275
CONFIRMATION_TONE5_GAIN page 275
REORDER_TONE_ENABLE page 275
TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT page 275
DIAL_TONE1_FRQ *2
page 276
DIAL_TONE1_GAIN page 276
DIAL_TONE1_RPT page 276
DIAL_TONE1_TIMING *2
page 276
DIAL_TONE2_FRQ page 276
DIAL_TONE2_GAIN page 277
DIAL_TONE2_RPT page 277
DIAL_TONE2_TIMING page 277
DIAL_TONE4_FRQ page 277
DIAL_TONE4_GAIN page 277
DIAL_TONE4_RPT page 278
DIAL_TONE4_TIMING page 278

164 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

BUSY_TONE_FRQ*2 page 278
BUSY_TONE_GAIN page 278
BUSY_TONE_RPT page 279
BUSY_TONE_TIMING page 279
REORDER_TONE_FRQ *2
page 279
REORDER_TONE_GAIN page 279
REORDER_TONE_RPT page 279
REORDER_TONE_TIMING*2 page 280
RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ*2 page 280
RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN page 280
RINGBACK_TONE_RPT page 280
RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING *2
page 281
HOLD_ALARM_FRQ page 281
HOLD_ALARM_GAIN page 281
CW_TONE1_FRQ page 281
CW_TONE1_GAIN page 281
HOLD_TONE_FRQ page 282
HOLD_TONE_GAIN page 282
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING page 282
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING page 282
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING page 282
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING page 283
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING page 283
KEY_PAD_TONE page 283

Call Control Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT*1 page 284
ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n *1
page 284
BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n*1 page 285
HOTLINE_ENABLE*2 page 285
HOTLINE_NUMBER*2 page 285
HOTLINE_TIM *2
page 285
DISPLAY_NAME_n*2 page 285
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE*2 page 286

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 165

5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

VM_NUMBER_n*2 page 286
VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_n page 286
DIAL_PLAN_n *2
page 286
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n*2 page 287
MACRODIGIT_TIM*2 page 287
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE*2 page 287
COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE*2 page 288
NATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE*2 page 288
ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE *2
page 288
EMERGENCY_CALLx*2 page 288
CALL_REJECTIONx*1 page 289
CLICKTO_ENABLE_n*2 page 289
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n*2 page 289
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_n*2 page 289
SHARED_STOP_LINE_SEIZE*2 page 290
FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n *2
page 290
FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_n page 291
CONF_SERVER_HOLD_ENABLE page 291
MOH_SERVER_URI_n *2
page 291
BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_n*2 page 291
BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_n*2 page 292
FWD_DND_CONTROL_ENABLE page 292
FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_MODE page 292
HOLD_AND_CALL_ENABLE page 292
AUTO_CALL_HOLD page 292
SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND page 293
SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_REJECT page 293
CW_ENABLE_n *2
page 293
RETURN_VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE page 293
CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI*2 page 293
RESOURCELIST_URI_n *2
page 294

Video Communication Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
DEFAULT_CALL_MODE *1
page 294

166 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.1 Configuration File Parameter List

Parameter Name Ref.

VIDEO_SCREEN_MODE*1 page 294
VIDEO_SEND_IMAGE_ENABLE*1 page 294
VIDEO_BIT_RATE *1
page 295
VIDEO_BIT_RATE_USE*1 page 295
VIDEO_FRAME_RATE*1 page 295
VIDEO_IMAGE_SIZE *1
page 295
H264_PAYLOAD page 296

Network Camera Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAMEx*3 page 296
NWCAMERA_ADDRx*3 page 296
NWCAMERA_PORTx *3
page 296
NWCAMERA_USER_IDx*3 page 297
NWCAMERA_PASSx*3 page 297
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAMEx*3 page 297
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBERx *3
page 297
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NAMEx*3 page 298
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NUMBERx*3 page 298
NWCAMERA_STREAMx *3
page 298
NWCAMERA_ALARM_NOTIFICATION*3 page 298
NWCAMERA_ALARM_DISARM_TIME*3 page 299
NWCAMERA_ALARM_PORT*3 page 299

Communication Camera Settings

Parameter Name Ref.
COMM_CAMERA_NUMBERx*2 page 299
COMM_CAMERA_NAMEx *2
page 299
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTINGx*2 page 299
DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERAx page 300
DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERAx page 300
DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERAx page 300
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERAx page 300
DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERAx page 301
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERAx page 301

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 167

5.2 General Information on the Configuration Files

Parameter Name Ref.

DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERAx page 301
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERAx page 301

Logging Settings
Parameter Name Ref.
SYSLOG_ADDR page 302
SYSLOG_PORT page 302
LOGGING_LEVEL_DNS page 302
LOGGING_LEVEL_NW1 page 302
LOGGING_LEVEL_FILE page 302
LOGGING_LEVEL_SIP page 302
LOGGING_LEVEL_TR069 page 303
LOGGING_LEVEL_STUN page 303
LOGGING_LEVEL_NW2 page 303
LOGGING_LEVEL_CFGPARSE page 303

*1 This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or Web user
interface programming).
*2 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
*3 This setting can also be configured through the Phone user interface programming.

5.2 General Information on the Configuration Files

5.2.1 Configuration File Parameters
The information on each parameter that can be written in a configuration file is shown in the tables below.
The information includes parameter name (as the title of the table), value format, description, permitted
value range, default value of each parameter, phone user interface reference, and Web user interface
reference.

Parameter Name
This is the system-predefined parameter name and cannot be changed.

Note
• Certain parameter names end with "_n". This signifies that these settings can be made to each line
individually. The number of lines available varies depending on the phone being used, as follows:
– KX-HDV430: 1–16
Value Format
Each parameter value is categorized into Integer, Boolean, or String. Some parameters require a composite
form such as "Comma-separated Integer" or "Comma-separated String".
• Integer: a numerical value, described as a sequence of numerical characters, optionally preceded by a
"-" (minus)
An empty string is not allowed.

168 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values

• Boolean: "Y" or "N"

• String: sequence of alphanumerical characters
For details about available characters, see 5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values.
• Comma-separated Integer: a list of integers, separated by commas
No space characters are allowed.
• Comma-separated String: a list of strings, separated by commas
No space characters are allowed.
• IPADDR: IPv4 address format.
• IPADDR-V6: IPv6 address format (can be abbreviated).
Description
Describes the details of the parameter.

Value Range
Indicates the permitted value range of the parameter.

Default Value
Indicates the factory default value of the parameter.
Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer/service provider.

Phone User Interface Reference

Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in phone user interface programming.

Web User Interface Reference

Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in Web user interface programming.

5.2.2 Characters Available for String Values

Unless noted otherwise in "Value Range", only ASCII characters can be used for parameter values. Unicode
characters can also be used in some parameter values.
Available ASCII characters are shown on a white background in the following table:

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 169

5.3 System Settings

5.3 System Settings

5.3.1 System Settings
FACTORY_RESET_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the operation of factory default
and carrier default.
Value Range • Y: Enable factory reset operation
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

BUTTON_LOCATION_SETTING
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the order (normal or reverse) of flexible keys and DSS keys.
Value Range • 0: Normal
• 1: Reverse
Default Value 0

SYS_HOME_MENU_ICONx
Value Format INTEGER
Description x=1–20
Specifies an arrangement of the icons on the Home menu.
Value Range 0: Original position
1: None
2: Function
3: Phonebook
4: Call History
5: Voice Message
6: FWD/DND
7: Application
8: Basic Settings
9: System Settings
10: Advanced Settings
11: Line Status
12: Presence
13: Call Center/Call Centre
14: Paging
15: Network Camera
16: Comm. Camera
17: XML shortcut1
18: XML shortcut2
19: XML shortcut3
20: XML shortcut4
21: XML shortcut5
22: XML shortcut6

170 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.1 System Settings

Default Value 0

Location numbers (x=1–20) of the icons on the Home menu

FWD_DND_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the "FWD/DND" setting is displayed in the menu.
Value Range • Y: Displayed
• N: Not displayed
Default Value Y

BLOCK_ANONY_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the "Block Anonymous" setting is displayed in the
menu.
Value Range • Y: Displayed
• N: Not displayed
Default Value Y

ANONY_CALL_MENU_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the "Anonymous Call" setting is displayed in the
menu.
Value Range • Y: Displayed
• N: Not displayed
Default Value Y

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 171

5.3.2 Basic Network Settings

TIME_ZONE_SET_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the "Time Zone" setting is displayed in the menu.
Value Range • Y: Displayed
• N: Not displayed
Default Value N

DISPLAY_CALL_KEY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether call information is displayed on Line and BLF
program/DSS keys.
Value Range • Y: Displayed
• N: Not displayed
Default Value N

5.3.2 Basic Network Settings

IP_ADDR_MODE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the IP addressing mode.
Value Range • 0: IPv4
• 1: IPv6
• 2: IPv4&IPv6
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference IP Addressing Mode

CONNECTION_TYPE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to assign the IP address automatically (DHCP) or
manually (static) for IPv4.
Value Range • 0: Static
• 1: DHCP
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference Connection Mode

STATIC_IP_ADDRESS
Value Format IPADDR

172 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.2 Basic Network Settings

Description Specifies the IP address for the unit for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is
set to "0".
• When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_SUBNET" together in a configuration file.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference IP Address

STATIC_SUBNET
Value Format IPADDR
Description Specifies the subnet mask for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is
set to "0".
• When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" together in a configuration file.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Subnet Mask

STATIC_GATEWAY
Value Format IPADDR
Description Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the IPv4 network
where the unit is connected.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is
set to "0".
• When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" and "STATIC_SUBNET" together in a
configuration file.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Default Gateway

USER_DNS1_ADDR
Value Format IPADDR

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 173

5.3.2 Basic Network Settings

Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is
set to "0".
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference DNS1

USER_DNS2_ADDR
Value Format IPADDR
Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server for IPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is
set to "0".
Value Range Max. 15 characters
n.n.n.n [n=0–255]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference DNS2

DHCP_DNS_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable using the DNS server obtained
by DHCPv4.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is
set to "1".
Value Range • Y: Not use (use static DNS)
• N: Use DNS obtained by DHCPv4
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Auto DNS via DHCP

DHCP_HOST_NAME
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the host name to option12 in DHCPv4 or option15 in
DHCPv6.

174 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.2 Basic Network Settings

Value Range Max. 64 characters

Note
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit’s model name.
Default Value {MODEL}
Web User Interface Reference DHCP Host Name

DHCP_VENDOR_CLASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the vendor class to option60 in DHCPv4 or option16 in
DHCPv6.
Value Range Max. 64 characters
Default Value Panasonic

CONNECTION_TYPE_IPV6
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the IP address setting mode for IPv6.
Value Range • 0: Static
• 1: DHCP
• 2: Stateless Autoconfiguration
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference Connection Mode

STATIC_IP_ADDRESS_IPV6
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description Specifies the IP address for IPv6.
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference IP Address

PREFIX_IPV6
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the prefix for IPv6.
Value Range 0–128
Default Value 64
Web User Interface Reference Prefix

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 175

5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings

STATIC_GATEWAY_IPV6
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description Specifies the default gateway for IPv6.
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Default Gateway

USER_DNS1_ADDR_IPV6
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description Specifies the IP address of primary DNS server for IPv6.
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference DNS1

USER_DNS2_ADDR_IPV6
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description Specifies the IP address of secondary DNS server for IPv6.
Value Range Max. 39 characters
n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n [n=0-FFFF, abbreviation available]
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference DNS2

DHCP_DNS_ENABLE_IPV6
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable using the DNS server obtained
by DHCPv6.
Value Range • Y: Not use (use static DNS)
• N: Use DNS obtained by DHCPv6
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Auto DNS via DHCP

5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings

PHY_MODE_LAN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the link speed and duplex mode of the LAN port.

176 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings

Value Range • 1: Auto

• 2: 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 3: 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 4: 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 5: 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference LAN Port

PHY_MODE_PC
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the link speed and duplex mode of the PC port.
Value Range • 1: Auto
• 2: 100Mbps/Full Duplex
• 3: 100Mbps/Half Duplex
• 4: 10Mbps/Full Duplex
• 5: 10Mbps/Half Duplex
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference PC Port

VLAN_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP
communication securely.

Note
• You should specify "Y" for only one of "LLDP_ENABLE" or
"VLAN_ENABLE".
If "Y" is specified for two or more of the parameters above, the
settings are prioritized as follows: "VLAN_ENABLE" >
"LLDP_ENABLE". Therefore, if "Y" is specified for both
"VLAN_ENABLE" and "LLDP_ENABLE", the VLAN-related
settings are used.
Value Range • Y (Enable)
• N (Disable)
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable VLAN

VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit.
Value Range 0–4094

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 177

5.3.3 Ethernet Port Settings

Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference IP Phone VLAN ID

VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the priority number for the unit.
Value Range 0–7
Default Value 7
Web User Interface Reference IP Phone Priority

VLAN_ID_PC
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.
Value Range 0–4094
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference PC VLAN ID

VLAN_PRI_PC
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the priority number for the PC.
Value Range 0–7
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference PC Priority

LLDP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the LLDP-MED feature.

Note
• You should specify "Y" for only one of "LLDP_ENABLE", or
"VLAN_ENABLE". If "Y" is specified for two or more of the
parameters above, the settings are prioritized as follows:
VLAN_ENABLE >LLDP_ENABLE. Therefore, if "Y" is specified
for both "VLAN_ENABLE" and "LLDP_ENABLE", the VLAN-
related settings are used.
Value Range • Y: Enable LLDP-MED
• N: Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable LLDP

178 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.4 Pre-Provisioning Settings

LLDP_INTERVAL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between sending each LLDP
frame.
Value Range 1–3600
Default Value 30
Web User Interface Reference Packet Interval

LLDP_VLAN_ID_PC
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC when LLDP is on.
Value Range 0–4094
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference PC VLAN ID

LLDP_VLAN_PRI_PC
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the VLAN Priority for the PC when LLDP is on.
Value Range 0–7
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference PC Priority

5.3.4 Pre-Provisioning Settings

SIPPNP_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the SIP PNP provisioning.
Value Range • Y: Enable SIP PnP provisioning
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

OPTION66_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the DHCP option 66
provisioning.

Note
• The unit will try to download configuration files through the
TFTP server, the IP address or FQDN of which is specified in
the option number 66 field.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 179

5.3.5 Provisioning Settings

Value Range • Y: Enable DHCP option66 provisioning

• N: Disable
Default Value Y

OPTION159_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the DHCP option159
provisioning.
Value Range • Y: Enable DHCP option159 provisioning
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

OPTION160_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the DHCP option160
provisioning.
Value Range • Y: Enable DHCP option160 provisioning
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

DHCPV6_OPTION17_PROV_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable DHCPv6 option17
provisioning.
Value Range • Y: Enable DHCPv6 option17 provisioning
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

5.3.5 Provisioning Settings

CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used
when every unit needs different settings.

180 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.5 Provisioning Settings

Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "Config{mac}.cfg" is
automatically added at the end of the URL. For example,
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http:// host/dir/" becomes
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://host/dir/
Config{mac}.cfg".
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Standard File URL

CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used
when all units with the same model number need the same settings.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "{MODEL}.cfg" is
automatically added at the end of the URL. For example,
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH="http://host/ dir/" becomes
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH="http:// host/dir/{MODEL}.cfg".
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Product File URL

CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used
when all units need the same settings.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "sip.cfg" is automatically
added at the end of the URL. For example,
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://host/ dir/" becomes
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http:// host/dir/sip.cfg".
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Master File URL

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 181

5.3.5 Provisioning Settings

CFG_CYCLIC
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the unit periodically checks for updates of
configuration files.
Value Range • Y: Enable periodic synchronization
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Cyclic Auto Resync

CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for
updates of the configuration files.
Value Range 1–40320
Default Value 10080
Web User Interface Reference Resync Interval

CFG_RESYNC_TIME
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the time (hour:minute) that the unit checks for updates of
configuration files.
Value Range 00:00–23:59

Note
• If the value for this setting is any valid value other than an
empty string, the unit downloads the configuration files at the
fixed time, and the settings specified in "CFG_CYCLIC",
"CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL", and "CFG_RTRY_INTVL" are disabled.
• If the value for this setting is an empty string, downloading the
configuration files at the fixed time are disabled.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Time Resync

CFG_RTRY_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the period of time, in minutes, that the unit will retry
checking for an update of the configuration files after a configuration
file access error has occurred.

Note
• This setting is available only when "CFG_CYCLIC" is set to "Y".
Value Range 1–1440

182 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.5 Provisioning Settings

Default Value 30

CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to
the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the
provisioning server.
Value Range Max. 15 characters
Default Value check-sync
Web User Interface Reference Header Value for Resync Event

CFG_RESYNC_ACTION
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of the action after received resync NOTIFY.
Value Range • 0: Provisioning
• 1: TR-069 Inform
• 2: Reboot
Default Value 0

CFG_FILE_KEY2
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration
files.

Note
• If the extension of the configuration file is ".e2c", the
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.
Value Range 32 characters

Note
• If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this
value is disabled.
Default Value Empty string

CFG_FILE_KEY3
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration
files.

Note
• If the extension of the configuration file is ".e3c", the
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 183

5.3.5 Provisioning Settings

Value Range 32 characters

Note
• If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this
value is disabled.
Default Value Empty string

CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the key lengths in bits used to decrypt configuration files.
Value Range 128,192,256
Default Value 192

CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.

Note
• Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

CFG_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

CFG_PKEY_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.

184 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings

Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

HTTP_SSL_VERIFY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
Value Range • 0 (No verification of root certificate)
• 1 (Simple verification of root certificate)
• 2 (Precise verification of root certificate)

Note
• If set to "0", the verification of the root certificate is disabled.
• If set to "1", the verification of the root certificate is enabled. In
this case, the validity of the certificate’s date, certificate’s chain,
and the confirmation of the root certificate will be verified.
• If set to "2", precise certificate verification is enabled. In this
case, the validity of the server name will be verified in addition
to the items verified when "1" is set.
• If the unit has not obtained the current time, verification will not
be performed irrelevant of this setting. In order to perform
verification it is necessary to first set up the NTP server.
Default Value 0

CFG_RESYNC_DURATION
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies, in minutes, a time range during which connected units can
access the server. Units will download configuration files at a random
time within this range.
Value Range 0–1439
Default Value 0

5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings

FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 185

5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings

Description Specifies whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects
a newer version of firmware.

Note
• Firmware updates using TR-069 can be performed regardless
of this setting.
Value Range • Y (Enable firmware updates)
• N (Disable firmware updates)
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable Firmware Update

FIRM_FILE_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored.

Note
• This setting is available only when "FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE"
is set to "Y".
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the value specified in "FIRM_VERSION".
For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Firmware File URL

FIRM_VERSION
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the firmware version of the unit.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Firmware Version

FWDL_RANDOM_DURATION
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies, in minutes, a time range during which connected units can
access the server. Units will download the firmware file at a random
time within this range.
Value Range 0–1439
Default Value 0

186 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.7 HTTP Settings

5.3.7 HTTP Settings

HTTP_VER
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP
communication.
Value Range • 1 (Use HTTP 1.0)
• 0 (Use HTTP 1.1)

Note
• For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you specify "1" for
this setting. However, if the HTTP server does not function well
with HTTP 1.0, try changing the setting "0".
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference HTTP Version

HTTP_USER_AGENT
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of
HTTP requests.
Value Range Max. 64 characters

Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the firmware version of the unit.
Default Value Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Web User Interface Reference HTTP User Agent

HTTP_AUTH_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the HTTP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 187

5.3.7 HTTP Settings

HTTP_AUTH_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the HTTP
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password

HTTP_PROXY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the HTTP proxy feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable HTTP proxy connect
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Proxy

HTTP_PROXY_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Address

HTTP_PROXY_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the proxy server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 8080
Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Port

HTTP_PROXY_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the user ID for connecting HTTP proxy.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string

HTTP_PROXY_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the password for connecting HTTP proxy.

188 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings

Value Range Max. 128 characters

Default Value Empty string

5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings

HTTPD_LISTEN_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number of own HTTP server.
Value Range 80, 1024–49151
Default Value 80

HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the unit’s Web port is always open.
Value Range • Y (Web port is always open)
• N (Web port is closed [can be opened temporarily through phone
user interface programming])

Notice
• If you want to set to "Y", please fully recognize the possibility of
unauthorized access to the unit through the Web user interface
and change this setting at your own risk. In addition, please
take full security measures for connecting to an external
network and control all passwords for logging in to the Web
user interface.
Default Value N

HTTPD_PORTCLOSE_TM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies port close time when keeping the no action.
Value Range 1–1440
Default Value 30

USER_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with
the User account.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 189

5.3.8 HTTPD/WEB Settings

Value Range Max. 16 characters

(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ),@, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)

Note
• An empty string is not allowed.
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value user

USER_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when
logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range 6–64 characters
(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @,*, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)

Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value Empty string (only before a user accesses the Web user interface for
the first time)
Web User Interface Reference New Password

ADMIN_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with
the Admin account.
Value Range Max. 16 characters
(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @,*, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)

Note
• An empty string is not allowed.
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value admin

ADMIN_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator
account when logging in to the Web user interface.

190 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.9 TR-069 Settings

Value Range 6–64 characters

(except !, ", #, $, %, &, ', (, ),@, *, +, ,, /, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, [, ], ^, `, {, |, },
~, \ and space)

Note
• A hyphen (-) cannot be used as the first character.
Default Value adminpass
Web User Interface Reference New Password

5.3.9 TR-069 Settings

ACS_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL of the Auto-Configuration Server for using TR-069.

Note
• This parameter must be in the form of a valid HTTP or HTTPS
URL, as defined in RFC 3986.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

ACS_USER_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the user ID for the Auto-Configuration Server for using
TR-069.
Value Range Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string

ACS_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the user password for the Auto-Configuration Server for
using TR-069.
Value Range Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string

PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether or not the CPE (Customer Premises Equipment)
must periodically send CPE information to the ACS (Auto-
Configuration Server) using the Inform method call.
Value Range • Y (Enable)
• N (Disable)

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 191

5.3.9 TR-069 Settings

Default Value N

PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval length, in seconds, when the CPE must attempt
to connect with the ACS and call the Inform method.

Note
• This setting is available only when
"PERIODIC_INFORM_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range 30–2419200
Default Value 86400

PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the time (UTC) to determine when the CPE will initiate the
periodic Inform method calls.

Note
• Each Inform call must occur at this reference time plus or
minus an integer multiple of the
"PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL". This
"PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME" parameter is used only to set the
"phase" of the periodic Informs. The actual value can be
arbitrarily set far into the past or future.
For example, if "PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL" is set to
86400 (one day) and if "PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME" is set to
midnight on a certain day, then periodic Informs will occur
every day at midnight, starting from the set date.
• If the time is set to "unknown time", the start time depends on
the CPE’s settings. However, the
"PERIODIC_INFORM_INTERVAL" must still be adhered to.
If absolute time is not available to the CPE, its periodic Inform
behavior must be the same as if the
"PERIODIC_INFORM_TIME" parameter was set to the
"unknown time".
• Time zones other than UTC are not supported.
Value Range 4–32 characters
date and time format
Default Value 0001-01-01T00:00:00Z

CON_REQ_USER_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the user name used to authenticate an ACS making a
Connection Request to the CPE.
Value Range Max. 256 characters

192 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.9 TR-069 Settings

Default Value Empty string

CON_REQ_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the password used to authenticate an ACS making a
Connection Request to the CPE.

Note
• When the "CON_REQ_USER_ID" parameter is specified, an
empty string for this parameter is not allowed.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether or not the CPE can use STUN. This applies only to
the use of STUN in association with the ACS to allow UDP
Connection Requests.
Value Range • Y (Enable)
• N (Disable)
Default Value N

ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the host name or IP address of the STUN server for the
CPE to send Binding Requests.

Note
• This setting is available only when "ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE"
is set to "Y".
• If the value for this setting is an empty string and
"ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE" is set to "Y", the CPE must use the
address of the ACS extracted from the host portion of the ACS
URL.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

ANNEX_G_STUN_SERV_PORT
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 193

5.3.9 TR-069 Settings

Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server for the CPE to send
Binding Requests.

Note
• This setting is available only when "ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE"
is set to "Y".
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 3478

ANNEX_G_STUN_USER_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the STUN user name to be used in Binding Requests (only
if message integrity has been requested by the STUN server).

Note
• If the value for this setting is an empty string, the CPE must not
send STUN Binding Requests with message integrity.
Value Range Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string

ANNEX_G_STUN_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the STUN password to be used in computing the
MESSAGE-INTEGRITY attribute used in Binding Requests (only if
message integrity has been requested by the STUN server). When
read, this parameter returns an empty string, regardless of the actual
value.
Value Range Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string

ANNEX_G_STUN_MAX_KEEP_ALIVE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum period, in seconds, that STUN Binding
Requests must be sent by the CPE for the purpose of maintaining the
binding in the Gateway. This applies specifically to Binding Requests
sent from the UDP Connection Request address and port.

Note
• This setting is available only when "ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE"
is set to "Y".
Value Range 1–3600
Default Value 300

194 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.10 XML Settings

ANNEX_G_STUN_MIN_KEEP_ALIVE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the minimum period, in seconds, that STUN Binding
Requests can be sent by the CPE for the purpose of maintaining the
binding in the Gateway. This limit applies only to Binding Requests
sent from the UDP Connection Request address and port, and only
those that do not contain the BINDING-CHANGE attribute.

Note
• This setting is available only when "ANNEX_G_STUN_ENABLE"
is set to "Y".
Value Range 1–3600
Default Value 30

UDP_CON_REQ_ADDR_NOTIFY_LIMIT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the minimum time, in seconds, between Active Notifications
resulting from changes to the "UDPConnectionRequestAddress" (if
Active Notification is enabled).
Value Range 0–65535
Default Value 0

DEVICE_PROVISIONING_CODE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the device provisioning code for use with TR-106
parameters.
Value Range Max. 64 characters
Default Value Empty string

5.3.10 XML Settings

XMLAPP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the XML application feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable XML application
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable XMLAPP

XMLAPP_USERID
Value Format STRING

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 195

5.3.10 XML Settings

Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the XML

application server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference User ID

XMLAPP_USERPASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the XML
application server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Password

XMLAPP_LDAP_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the phonebook is accessed,
to check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference LDAP URL

XMLAPP_LDAP_USERID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference User ID

XMLAPP_LDAP_USERPASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the LDAP
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Password

XMLAPP_NPB_SEARCH_TIMER
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the time which is for searching XML phonebook.

196 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.10 XML Settings

Value Range 1–65535

Default Value 30

XMLAPP_LDAP_MAXRECORD
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by
the LDAP server.
Value Range 20–500
Default Value 20
Web User Interface Reference Max Hits

XML_HTTPD_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the local HTTP port for XML application.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 6666
Web User Interface Reference Local XML Port

XML_ERROR_INFORMATION
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to display an error information when an error
occurs.
Value Range • Y: Error information is displayed
• N: Error information is not displayed
Default Value Y

XMLAPP_START_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit starts up, to check
for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Bootup URL

XMLAPP_INITIAL_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the application is started
from the unit’s menu, to check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 197

5.3.10 XML Settings

Web User Interface Reference Initial URL

XMLAPP_INCOMING_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit receives a call, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Incoming Call URL

XMLAPP_TALKING_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is on a call, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Talking URL

XMLAPP_MAKECALL_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit makes a call, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Making Call URL

XMLAPP_CALLLOG_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the call log is accessed, to
check for XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Call Log URL

XMLAPP_IDLING_URL
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URL that is accessed when the unit is idle, to check for
XML data.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

198 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.10 XML Settings

Web User Interface Reference Idling URL

XMLAPP_FFKEY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the XML application or operate the
telephone normally, when the corresponding button is pressed.
Value Range • Y: XML Mode
• N: Normal Telephone Mode
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable FF Key

XMLAPP_STATUSBAR_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Status Bar XML
application feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable the Status Bar XML application feature
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

XMLAPP_URL_FLEX_BUTTONx
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–24
Specifies the URL that is accessed when the FFx key is pressed.
Value Range Max. 256 characters ("&" may also be used)
Default Value Empty string

SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_NAMEx
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–6
Specifies the name of an icon for an XML feature on the Home menu.
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value X=1:Application 1
X=2:Application 2
X=3:Application 3
X=4:Application 4
X=5:Application 5
X=6:Application 6

SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_URLx
Value Format STRING

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 199

5.3.11 XSI Settings

Description x=1–6
Specifies the URL that is accessed by an XML feature on the Home
menu.
Value Range Max. 256 characters ("&" may also be used.)
Default Value Empty string

SYS_HOME_MENU_XML_ICONx
Value Format INTEGER
Description x=1–6
Specifies the feature of an icon on the Home menu.
Value Range 1–35
Default Value 13

Icon Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 30

31 32 33 34 35

Note
• No.16, 21–29: Blank

5.3.11 XSI Settings

XSI_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi service.
Value Range • Y: Enable Xsi service
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Xtended Service

XSI_SERVER
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the Xsi server.

200 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.11 XSI Settings

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Server Address

XSI_SERVER_TYPE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the type of the Xsi server.
Value Range • HTTP
• HTTPS
Default Value HTTP
Web User Interface Reference Protocol

XSI_SERVER_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the Xsi server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 80
Web User Interface Reference Port

XSI_USERID_n
Parameter Name Example XSI_USERID_1, XSI_USERID_2, …, XSI_USERID_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Xsi server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference User ID

XSI_PASSWORD_n
Parameter Name Example XSI_PASSWORD_1, XSI_PASSWORD_2, …, XSI_PASSWORD_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the Xsi
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Password

XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_1, XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_2, …,
XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_16

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 201

5.3.11 XSI Settings

Value Format BOOLEAN

Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi phonebook service.
Value Range • Y: Enable Xsi phonebook
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Phonebook

XSI_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for
updates of the Xsi Directory (Phonebook) files.
If this parameter is set to "0", the timing is the same as updating the
configuration files.
Value Range 0–40320
Default Value 0

XSI_PHONEBOOK_RESYNC_DURATION
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the time range, in minutes, during which connected units
can access the server.
Xsi Directory (Phonebook) files will be downloaded at a random time
within this range.
Value Range 0–1439
Default Value 0

XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_n
Parameter Name Example XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_1, XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_2, …,
XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the type of Xsi phonebook.
Value Range 1: Group
2: GroupCommon
3: Enterprise
4: EnterpriseCommon
5: Personal
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference Phonebook Type

XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_1, XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_2, …,
XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN

202 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.11 XSI Settings

Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi call log service.
Value Range • Y: Enable Xsi call log
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Call Log

XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_1, XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_2, …,
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Visual Voice Mail feature
of the selected line.
Value Range • Y: Enable Visual Voice Mail
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Visual Voice Mail

XSI_SIP_CREDENTIALS_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the XSI SIP Credentials
feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable XSI SIP Credentials
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference SIP Credentials

BSD_MULTI_TYPE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether you can select the type of Xsi phonebook.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_1, BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_2, …,
BSD_GROUP_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Group" type for Xsi
phonebooks.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 203

5.3.11 XSI Settings

Value Range • Y: Enable

• N: Disable
Default Value N

BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_1, BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_2, …,
BSD_GROUPCOM_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Group Common" type for
Xsi phonebooks.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_1, BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_2, …,
BSD_ENTERPRISE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Enterprise" type for Xsi
phonebooks.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_1,
BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_2, …,
BSD_ENTERPRISECOM_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Enterprise Common" type
for Xsi phonebooks.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_1, BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_2, …,
BSD_PERSONAL_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the "Personal" type for Xsi
phonebooks.

204 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings

Value Range • Y: Enable

• N: Disable
Default Value N

5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings

UC_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the UC service.
Value Range • Y: Enable UC service
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable UC

UC_USERID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the UC server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference User ID

UC_PASSWORD
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the UC
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Password

XMPP_SERVER
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the XMPP server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Server Address

XMPP_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the local XMPP port.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 205

5.3.12 XMPP (UC-ONE) Settings

Value Range 1–65535

Default Value 5222
Web User Interface Reference Local XMPP Port

XMPP_TLS_VERIFY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
Value Range 0: No verification
1: Simple verification
2: Precise verification
Default Value 0

XMPP_ROOT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

XMPP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

XMPP_PKEY_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

206 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.13 LDAP Settings

UC_DNSSRV_ENA
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain
names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range • Y: Enable DNS SRV lookup
• N: Disable
Default Value N

UC_TCP_SRV_PREFIX
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value _xmpp-client._tcp.

UC_USERID_CASE_SENSITIVE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the authentication ID is case-sensitive when
accessing the UC server.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

5.3.13 LDAP Settings

LDAP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the LDAP service.
Value Range • Y: Enable LDAP service
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable LDAP

LDAP_DNSSRV_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain
names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range • Y: Enable DNS SRV lookup
• N: Disable

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 207

5.3.13 LDAP Settings

Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable DNS SRV lookup

LDAP_SERVER
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the server host of LDAP.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Server Address

LDAP_SERVER_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the LDAP server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 389
Web User Interface Reference Port

LDAP_MAXRECORD
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum number of search results to be returned by
the LDAP server.
Value Range 20–500
Default Value 20
Web User Interface Reference Max Hits

LDAP_NUMB_SEARCH_TIMER
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the timer for searching telephone number.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 30

LDAP_NAME_SEARCH_TIMER
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the timer for searching name.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5

LDAP_USERID
Value Format STRING

208 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.13 LDAP Settings

Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the LDAP server.

Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference User ID

LDAP_PASSWORD
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the LDAP
server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Password

LDAP_NAME_FILTER
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the name filter which is the search criteria for name look up.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value (|(cn=%)(sn=%))
Web User Interface Reference Name Filter

LDAP_NUMB_FILTER
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the number filter which is the search criteria for number look
up.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value (|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile=%)(homePhone=%))
Web User Interface Reference Number Filter

LDAP_NAME_ATTRIBUTE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the name attributes of each record which are to be returned
in the LDAP search result.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value cn,sn
Web User Interface Reference Name Attributes

LDAP_NUMB_ATTRIBUTE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the number attributes of each record which are to be
returned in the LDAP search result.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 209

5.3.13 LDAP Settings

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value telephoneNumber,mobile,homePhone
Web User Interface Reference Number Attributes

LDAP_BASEDN
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the entry information on the screen.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Distinguished Name(Base DN)

LDAP_SSL_VERIFY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
Value Range 0: No verification
1: Simple verification
2: Precise verification
Default Value 0

LDAP_ROOT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

LDAP_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

LDAP_PKEY_PATH
Value Format STRING

210 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.14 Call Center Settings

Description Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.

Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

LDAP_DISPLAY_FORMAT
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the display name by using the attributes of each record
returned in the LDAP search results.
Value Range Max. 256 characters (LDAP attributes) A unit uses the initial settings
for the display if this setting is NULL.
Default Value Empty string

5.3.14 Call Center Settings

CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_1, CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_2, …,
CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add menu items for Call Center.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Call Center

ACD_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example ACD_ENABLE_1, ACD_ENABLE_2, …, ACD_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the ACD.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable ACD

ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_n
Parameter Name Example ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_1, ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_2, …,
ACD_LOGIN_CONDITION_16
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 211

5.3.14 Call Center Settings

Description Specifies the ACD state when login to the ACD.

Value Range • 0: Available
• 1: Unavailable
Default Value 0

ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_n
Parameter Name Example ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_1, ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_2, …,
ACD_LOGOUT_CONDITION_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the ACD state when logout to the ACD.
Value Range • 0: Continue
• 1: Unavailable
Default Value 1

CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_1,
CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_2, …,
CC_DISPOSITION_CODE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the Disposition Code.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Disposition Code

CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_1,
CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_2, …,
CC_CUSTOMER_ORG_TRACE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the Customer Originated Trace.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Customer Originated Trace

CC_HOTELING_EVENT_n
Parameter Name Example CC_HOTELING_EVENT_1, CC_HOTELING_EVENT_2, …,
CC_HOTELING_EVENT_16

212 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.14 Call Center Settings

Value Format BOOLEAN

Description Specifies whether to enable the Hoteling Event.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Hoteling Event

HOTELING_USERID_n
Parameter Name Example HOTELING_USERID_1, HOTELING_USERID_2, …,
HOTELING_USERID_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the Hoteling
service.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference - User ID

HOTELING_PASSWORD_n
Parameter Name Example HOTELING_PASSWORD_1, HOTELING_PASSWORD_2, …,
HOTELING_PASSWORD_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password required to access the Hoteling
service.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference - Password

CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_1, CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_2,
…, CC_STATUS_EVENT_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the Status Event.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Status Event

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 213

5.3.15 SNMP Settings

5.3.15 SNMP Settings

Note
• Changing SNMP setting may require restarting the unit.

SNMP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable SNMP feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable SNMP
• N: Disable
Default Value N

SNMP_TRUST_IP
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the trusted SNMP server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

SNMP_TRUST_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the trusted SNMP server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 161

SNMP_RO_COMMUNITY_STRING
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the community name for read-only.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

SNMP_SECURITY_TYPE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the security type of SNMPv3.
Value Range 0: noAuthNoPriv
1: AuthNoPriv
2: AuthPriv
Default Value 0

SNMP_SECURITY_USER
Value Format STRING

214 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings

Description Specifies the security user ID for authentication and encryption of

SNMPv3.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

SNMP_AUTH_TYPE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the authentication type of SNMPv3.
Value Range 0: MD5
1: SHA
Default Value 0

SNMP_AUTH_PASSWORD
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password of SNMPv3.
Value Range 0, 8–64 characters
Default Value Empty string

SNMP_ENCRYPT_TYPE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the encryption type of SNMPv3.
Value Range 0: DES
1: AES
Default Value 1

SNMP_ENCRYPT_PASSWORD
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the encryption password of SNMPv3.
Value Range 0, 8–64 characters
Default Value Empty string

5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings

MPAGE_ADDRm
Parameter Name Example MPAGE_ADDR1, MPAGE_ADDR2, …, MPAGE_ADDR5
Value Format IPADDR
Description Specifies the address for multi-cast paging for each channel group.
(m=1–5, the channel group) {Priority: 5 > 4 > 3, 2, 1 (depending on
the configuration)}
Value Range 224.0.0.0–239.255.255.255
Default Value Empty string

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 215

5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings

Web User Interface Reference IPv4 Address (Group 1–5)

MPAGE_IPV6_ADDRm
Parameter Name Example MPAGE_IPV6_ADDR1, MPAGE_IPV6_ADDR2, …,
MPAGE_IPV6_ADDR5
Value Format IPADDR-V6
Description Specifies the IPv6 address for multi-cast paging for each channel
group. (m=1–5, the channel group) {Priority: 5 > 4 > 3, 2, 1
(depending on the configuration)}
Value Range FF00::/8
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference IPv6 Address (Group 1–5)

MPAGE_PORTm
Parameter Name Example MPAGE_PORT1, MPAGE_PORT2, …, MPAGE_PORT5
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number for multi-cast paging for each channel
group. (m=1–5, the channel group)
Value Range 0–65535
(0: not used)
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Port (Group 1–5)

MPAGE_PRIORITYm
Parameter Name Example MPAGE_PRIORITY1, MPAGE_PRIORITY2, MPAGE_PRIORITY3
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the priority of the low priority channel group. (m=1–3)
The priority of multi-cast paging group1–3 is lower than the talking.
Priority 4 is higher than priority 5.
Value Range 4,5
(Talk > 4 > 5)
Default Value 5
Web User Interface Reference Priority (Group 1–3)

MPAGE_LABELm
Parameter Name Example MPAGE_LABEL1, MPAGE_LABEL2, …, MPAGE_LABEL5
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies a label for each channel group. (m=1–5, the channel group)
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value Empty string

216 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.16 Multicast Paging Settings

Web User Interface Reference Label (Group 1–5)

MPAGE_SEND_ENABLEm
Parameter Name Example MPAGE_SEND_ENABLE1, MPAGE_SEND_ENABLE2, …,
MPAGE_SEND_ENABLE5
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies the sending multi-cast paging. (m=1–5, the channel group)
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Transmission (Group 1–5)

MPAGE_CODEC
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the codec for multi-cast paging.
Value Range 0 : "G722"
1 : "PCMA"
2:–
3 : "G729A"
4 : "PCMU"
Default Value 0

MPAGE_SP_VOL_EMERGENCY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the speaker level for new received multi-cast paging
(emergency channel).
Value Range 0–8
0: No control
Default Value 0

MPAGE_SP_VOL_PRIORITY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the speaker level for new received multi-cast paging
(priority channel).
Value Range 0–8
0: No control
Default Value 0

MPAGE_DND_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies the DND setting (on/off) for multi-cast paging.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 217

5.3.17 NTP Settings

Value Range • Y: Enable DND for Multi-cast paging

• N: Disable DND for Multi-cast paging
Default Value N

MPAGE_FUNCKEY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the multicast paging key in
function menu.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

5.3.17 NTP Settings

NTP_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of NTP server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Server Address

TIME_SYNC_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, to resynchronize after having
detected no reply from the NTP server.
Value Range 10–86400
Default Value 60

TIME_QUERY_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the
NTP server.
Value Range 10–86400
Default Value 43200
Web User Interface Reference Synchronization Interval (Synchronisation Interval)

5.3.18 Time Settings

LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX
Value Format STRING

218 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.18 Time Settings

Description Specifies a IEEE 1003.1 (POSIX)-compliant local time zone definition

(e.g., "EST+5 EDT,M4.1.0/2,M10.5.0/2").

Note
• If this parameter is specified, the following parameters are
disabled, and operation will be based on this parameter.
– TIME_ZONE
– DST_ENABLE
– DST_OFFSET
– DST_START_MONTH
– DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY
– DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK
– DST_START_TIME
– DST_STOP_MONTH
– DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY
– DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
– DST_STOP_TIME
Value Range Max. 70 characters
Default Value Empty string

TIME_ZONE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the offset of local standard time from UTC (GMT), in
minutes.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 219

5.3.18 Time Settings

Value Range -720–780

Note
• Only the following values are available:
-720 (GMT -12:00), -660 (GMT -11:00), -600 (GMT -10:00),
-540 (GMT -09:00), -480 (GMT -08:00), -420 (GMT -07:00),
-360 (GMT -06:00), -300 (GMT -05:00), -240 (GMT -04:00),
-210 (GMT -03:30), -180 (GMT -03:00), -120 (GMT -02:00), -60
(GMT -01:00), 0 (GMT), 60 (GMT +01:00), 120 (GMT +02:00),
180 (GMT +03:00), 210 (GMT +03:30), 240 (GMT +04:00), 270
(GMT +04:30), 300 (GMT +05:00), 330 (GMT +05:30), 345
(GMT +05:45), 360 (GMT +06:00), 390 (GMT +06:30), 420
(GMT +07:00), 480 (GMT +08:00), 540 (GMT +09:00), 570
(GMT +09:30), 600 (GMT +10:00), 660 (GMT +11:00), 720
(GMT +12:00), 780 (GMT +13:00)
• If your location is west of Greenwich (0 [GMT]), the value
should be minus. For example, the value for New York City,
U.S.A. is "-300" (Eastern Standard Time being 5 hours behind
GMT).
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Time Zone

DST_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable DST (Summer Time).

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range • Y (Enable DST [Summer Time])
• N (Disable DST [Summer Time])
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)

DST_OFFSET
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when
"DST_ENABLE" is set to "Y".

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.

220 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.18 Time Settings

Value Range 0–720

Note
• This parameter is usually set to "60".
Default Value 60
Web User Interface Reference DST Offset (Summer Time Offset)

DST_START_MONTH
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 1–12
Default Value 3
Web User Interface Reference Month

DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time)
starts. The actual start day is specified in
"DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK". For example, to specify the second
Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter, and "0" in the next parameter.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 1–5
– 1: the first week of the month
– 2: the second week of the month
– 3: the third week of the month
– 4: the fourth week of the month
– 5: the last week of the month
Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference Day of Week

DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 221

5.3.18 Time Settings

Description Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 0–6
– 0: Sunday
– 1: Monday
– 2: Tuesday
– 3: Wednesday
– 4: Thursday
– 5: Friday
– 6: Saturday
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Day of Week

DST_START_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 0–1439
Default Value 120
Web User Interface Reference Time

DST_STOP_MONTH
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 1–12
Default Value 10
Web User Interface Reference Month

DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY
Value Format INTEGER

222 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.18 Time Settings

Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time)
ends. The actual end day is specified in "DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK".
For example, to specify the second Sunday, specify "2" in this
parameter, and "0" in the next parameter.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 1–5
– 1: the first week of the month
– 2: the second week of the month
– 3: the third week of the month
– 4: the fourth week of the month
– 5: the last week of the month
Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference Day of Week

DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 0–6
– 0: Sunday
– 1: Monday
– 2: Tuesday
– 3: Wednesday
– 4: Thursday
– 5: Friday
– 6: Saturday
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Day of Week

DST_STOP_TIME
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 223

5.3.19 Network Phonebook (Common)

Description Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.

Note
• This parameter is disabled when the
"LOCAL_TIME_ZONE_POSIX" parameter is specified.
Value Range 0–1439
Default Value 120
Web User Interface Reference Time

5.3.19 Network Phonebook (Common)

ONLY_NPB_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to be available the unit phonebook when the
network phonebook is enabled.
Value Range • Y: Not use unit phonebook
• N: Use unit phonebook
Default Value N

NETWORK_SEARCH_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to perform the phonebook search at the time of the
receiving the incoming or the searching the received log.
Value Range • Y: Enable phonebook search
• N: Disable
Default Value N

5.3.20 Language Settings

AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the selectable language on the unit.
Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, da, nl, sv, fi, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, no, ro,
ct, kk, me → see 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Web User Interface Reference IP Phone

DEFAULT_LANGUAGE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the default language on the unit.

224 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.20 Language Settings

Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, da, nl, sv, fi, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, no, ro,
ct, kk, me → see 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Default Value en
Web User Interface Reference IP Phone

LANGUAGE_PATHx
Parameter Name Example LANGUAGE_PATH1, LANGUAGE_PATH2, …, LANGUAGE_PATH10
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI of the language file.
x=1–10
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

LANGUAGE_VERx
Parameter Name Example LANGUAGE_VER1, LANGUAGE_VER2, …, LANGUAGE_VER10
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the version of the language file.
x=1–10
Value Range "00.000.000"–"15.999.999"
Default Value Empty string

AVAILABLE_LANGUAGE_WEB
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the selectable language on the Web.
Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, nl, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, ro, ct, kk, me →
see 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Web User Interface Reference Web Language

WEB_LANGUAGE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the default language on the unit.
Value Range en, es, fr, de, it, nl, el, hu, pt, pl, sk, cs, sh, ru, uk, tr, ro, ct, kk, me →
see 4.4.1.1 Selectable Language
Default Value en
Web User Interface Reference Web Language

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 225

5.3.21 NAT Settings

WEB_LANGUAGE_PATHx
Parameter Name Example WEB_LANGUAGE_PATH1, WEB_LANGUAGE_PATH2, …,
WEB_LANGUAGE_PATH10
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI of the language file.
x=1–10
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

WEB_LANGUAGE_VERx
Parameter Name Example WEB_LANGUAGE_VER1, WEB_LANGUAGE_VER2, …,
WEB_LANGUAGE_VER10
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the version of the language file.
x=1–10
Value Range "00.000.000"–"15.999.999"
Default Value Empty string

5.3.21 NAT Settings

STUN_SERV_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the primary STUN server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Server Address

STUN_SERV_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the primary STUN server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 3478
Web User Interface Reference Port

STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the secondary STUN server.

226 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.21 NAT Settings

Value Range Max. 256 characters

Default Value Empty string

STUN_2NDSERV_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number of the secondary STUN server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 3478

STUN_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval of the sending binding request.
Value Range 60–86400
Default Value 300
Web User Interface Reference Binding Interval

SIP_ADD_RPORT
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the 'rport' parameter to the top Via header
field value of requests generated.
Value Range • Y: Enable Rport
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Rport (RFC 3581)

PORT_PUNCH_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for SIP
packet.
Value Range 0, 10–300
0: Disable
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Enable Port Punching for SIP

RTP_PORT_PUNCH_INTVL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet in order to maintain the NAT binding information for RTP
packet.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 227

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Range 0, 10–300

0: Disable
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Enable Port Punching for RTP

EXTERNAL_RTP_PORTx
Value Format INTEGER
Description x=1–48
Specifies the port number of the router in Static NAT status.
Value Range 0, 1024–59998 (only even ports)
0: Disable
Default Value 0

5.3.22 SIP Settings

SIP_USER_AGENT
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of
SIP messages.
Value Range Max. 64 characters

Note
• If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
• If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
• If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit’s model name.
• If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the firmware version of the unit.
• If "{sipver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the SIP software version of the unit.
Default Value Panasonic-{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Web User Interface Reference User Agent

PHONE_NUMBER_n
Parameter Name Example PHONE_NUMBER_1, PHONE_NUMBER_2, …, PHONE_NUMBER_16
Value Format STRING

228 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Description Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for
registration to the SIP registrar server.

Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number,
you should use the "SIP_URI_n" setting.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Phone Number

SIP_URI_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_URI_1, SIP_URI_2, …, SIP_URI_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server, which
consists of "sip:", a user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for
example, "sip:[email protected]", "2405551111_1".

Note
• When registering using a user ID that is not a phone number,
you should use this setting.
• In a SIP URI, the user part ("user" in the example above) can
contain up to 63 characters, and the host part ("example.com"
in the example above) can contain up to 316 characters.
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference SIP URI

SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1, SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Registrar Server Address

SIP_RGSTR_PORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1, SIP_RGSTR_PORT_2, …,
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
registrar server.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 229

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Range 1–65535

Default Value 5060
Web User Interface Reference Registrar Server Port

SIP_PRXY_ADDR_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1, SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2, …, SIP_PRXY_ADDR_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Address

SIP_PRXY_PORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_PRXY_PORT_1, SIP_PRXY_PORT_2, …, SIP_PRXY_PORT_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
proxy server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Port

SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1, SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Presence Server Address

SIP_PRSNC_PORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1, SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2, …,
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
presence server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Web User Interface Reference Presence Server Port

230 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1, SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Outbound Proxy Server Address

SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1, SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2, …,
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
outbound proxy server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Web User Interface Reference Outbound Proxy Server Port

SIP_SVCDOMAIN_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1, SIP_SVCDOMAIN_2, …, SIP_SVCDOMAIN_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer/
service provider. The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that
comes after the "@" symbol.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Service Domain

SIP_AUTHID_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_AUTHID_1, SIP_AUTHID_2, …, SIP_AUTHID_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID

SIP_PASS_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_PASS_1, SIP_PASS_2, …, SIP_PASS_16

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 231

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Format STRING

Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.
Value Range Max. 128 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password

SIP_SRC_PORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_SRC_PORT_1, SIP_SRC_PORT_2, …, SIP_SRC_PORT_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP
communication.
Value Range 1024–49151

Note
• The SIP port number for each line must be unique.
Default Value SIP_SRC_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_SRC_PORT_2="5070"
SIP_SRC_PORT_3="5080"
SIP_SRC_PORT_4="5090"
SIP_SRC_PORT_5="5100"
SIP_SRC_PORT_6="5110"
SIP_SRC_PORT_7="5120"
SIP_SRC_PORT_8="5130"
SIP_SRC_PORT_9="5140"
SIP_SRC_PORT_10="5150"
SIP_SRC_PORT_11="5160"
SIP_SRC_PORT_12="5170"
SIP_SRC_PORT_13="5180"
SIP_SRC_PORT_14="5190"
SIP_SRC_PORT_15="5200"
SIP_SRC_PORT_16="5210"
Web User Interface Reference Local SIP Port

DSCP_SIP_n
Parameter Name Example DSCP_SIP_1, DSCP_SIP_2, …, DSCP_SIP_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to SIP packets.
Value Range 0–63
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)

232 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1, SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_2, …,
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain
names into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range • Y (Enable DNS SRV lookup)
• N (Disable DNS SRV lookup)

Note
• If set to "Y", the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP
registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server,
or SIP presence server.
• If set to "N", the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a
SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy
server, or SIP presence server.
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable DNS SRV lookup

SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using UDP.

Note
• This setting is available only when "SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n" is
set to "Y".
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value _sip._udp.
Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for UDP

SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.

Note
• This setting is available only when "SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_n" is
set to "Y".

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 233

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Range Max. 32 characters

Default Value _sip._tcp.
Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for TCP

REG_EXPIRE_TIME_n
Parameter Name Example REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1, REG_EXPIRE_TIME_2, …,
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER
request.
Value Range 1–4294967295
Default Value 3600
Web User Interface Reference REGISTER Expires Timer

REG_INTERVAL_RATE_n
Parameter Name Example REG_INTERVAL_RATE_1, REG_INTERVAL_RATE_2, …,
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh
registration by sending a new REGISTER message in the same
dialog.
Value Range 1–100
Default Value 50

REG_RTX_INTVL_n
Parameter Name Example REG_RTX_INTVL_1, REG_RTX_INTVL_2, …, REG_RTX_INTVL_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the
REGISTER request when a registration results in failure (server no
reply or error reply).
Value Range 1–86400
Default Value 10

USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_n
Parameter Name Example USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_1, USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_2, …,
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable cancelation before registration when, for
example, the unit is turned on.

234 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Range • Y: Send un-REGISTER

• N: Does not send
Default Value N

USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_n
Parameter Name Example USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_1, USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_2, …,
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the cancelation of registration before the
SIP function shuts down when, for example, the configuration has
changed.
Value Range • Y: Send un-REGISTER
• N: Does not send
Default Value N

SIP_SESSION_TIME_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_SESSION_TIME_1, SIP_SESSION_TIME_2, …,
SIP_SESSION_TIME_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before
terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is
received. For details, refer to RFC 4028.
Value Range 0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Enable Session Timer (RFC 4028)

SIP_SESSION_METHOD_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_SESSION_METHOD_1, SIP_SESSION_METHOD_2, …,
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the refreshing method of SIP sessions.
Value Range 0–2
– 0: reINVITE
– 1: UPDATE
– 2: AUTO
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Session Timer Method

SIP_TIMER_T1_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_T1_1, SIP_TIMER_T1_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T1_16

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 235

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Format INTEGER

Description Specifies the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions
of SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range • 250
• 500
• 1000
• 2000
• 4000
Default Value 500
Web User Interface Reference T1 Timer

SIP_TIMER_T2_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_T2_1, SIP_TIMER_T2_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T2_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions
of SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range • 2
• 4
• 8
• 16
• 32
Default Value 4
Web User Interface Reference T2 Timer

SIP_TIMER_T4_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_T4_1, SIP_TIMER_T4_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T4_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum period, in seconds, that a message can
remain on the network.
Value Range • 0
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• 5
Default Value 5

SIP_TIMER_B_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_B_1, SIP_TIMER_B_2, …, SIP_TIMER_B_16

236 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Format INTEGER

Description Specifies the value of SIP timer B (INVITE transaction timeout timer),
in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range 250–64000
Default Value 32000

SIP_TIMER_D_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_D_1, SIP_TIMER_D_2, …, SIP_TIMER_D_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of SIP timer D (wait time for answer resending), in
milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range 0, 250–64000
Default Value 5000

SIP_TIMER_F_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_F_1, SIP_TIMER_F_2, …, SIP_TIMER_F_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of SIP timer F (non-INVITE transaction timeout
timer), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range 250–64000
Default Value 32000

SIP_TIMER_H_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_H_1, SIP_TIMER_H_2, …, SIP_TIMER_H_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of SIP timer H (wait time for ACK reception), in
milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range 250–64000
Default Value 32000

SIP_TIMER_J_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_J_1, SIP_TIMER_J_2, …, SIP_TIMER_J_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the value of SIP timer J (wait time for non-INVITE request
resending), in milliseconds. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range 0, 250–64000
Default Value 5000

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 237

5.3.22 SIP Settings

SIP_100REL_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1, SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2, …,
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported"
header of the INVITE message. For details, refer to RFC 3262.
Value Range • Y (Enable 100rel function)
• N (Disable 100rel function)

Note
• If set to "Y", the Reliability of Provisional Responses function
will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to the
"Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message.
• If set to "N", the option tag 100rel will not be used.
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable 100rel (RFC 3262)

SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1, SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2, …,
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the retransmission interval, in seconds, for "18x" responses.
Value Range 0, 1–600 (0: Disable)
Default Value 0

SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1, SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2, …,
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the subscription remains
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the SUBSCRIBE
request.
Value Range 1–4294967295
Default Value 3600

SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_n
Parameter Name Example SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1, SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2, …,
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_16
Value Format INTEGER

238 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Description Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh
subscriptions by sending a new SUBSCRIBE message in the same
dialog.
Value Range 1–100
Default Value 50

SUB_RTX_INTVL_n
Parameter Name Example SUB_RTX_INTVL_1, SUB_RTX_INTVL_2, …, SUB_RTX_INTVL_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of
SUBSCRIBE requests when a subscription results in failure (server
no reply or error reply).
Value Range 1–86400
Default Value 10

SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_1, SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_2, …,
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header to SIP
messages.
Value Range • Y (Add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header)
• N (Do not add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header)
Default Value N

SIP_PRIVACY_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_PRIVACY_1, SIP_PRIVACY_2, …, SIP_PRIVACY_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the "Privacy" header to SIP messages.
Value Range • Y (Add the "Privacy" header)
• N (Do not add the "Privacy" header)
Default Value N

ADD_USER_PHONE_n
Parameter Name Example ADD_USER_PHONE_1, ADD_USER_PHONE_2, …,
ADD_USER_PHONE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add "user=phone" to the SIP URI in SIP
messages.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 239

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Range • Y (Add "user=phone")

• N (Do not add "user=phone")

Note
• SIP URI example:
– "sip:[email protected];user=phone", when
set to "Y"
– "sip:[email protected]", when set to "N"
Default Value N

SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_1, SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_2, …,
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the text string to set as the display name in the "From"
header when making anonymous calls.
Value Range • 0 (Use normal display name)
• 1 (Use "Anonymous" for display name)
• 2 (Do not send a display name)
Default Value 1

SIP_ANM_USERNAME_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM_USERNAME_1, SIP_ANM_USERNAME_2, …,
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the text string to set as the user name in the "From" header
when making anonymous calls.
Value Range • 0 (Use normal user name)
• 1 (Use "anonymous" for user name)
• 2 (Do not send a user name)
Default Value 0

SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_1, SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_2, …,
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to set an anonymous host name in the "From"
header when making anonymous calls.
Value Range • Y (Use "anonymous.invalid" for host name)
• N (Use normal host name)

240 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Default Value N

SIP_DETECT_SSAF_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1, SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2, …,
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers (registrar
server, proxy server, and presence server).
Value Range • Y (Enable SSAF)
• N (Disable SSAF)

Note
• If set to "Y", the unit receives SIP messages only from the
source addresses stored in the SIP servers (registrar server,
proxy server, and presence server), and not from other
addresses. However, if "SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_n" in
5.3.22 SIP Settings is specified, the unit also receives SIP
messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound
proxy server.
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter)

SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_1, SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_2, …,
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to check the user name part of the SIP URI in the
"To" header when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect
target SIP URI.
Value Range • Y (Enable username check)
• N (Disable username check)

Note
• If set to "Y", the unit will return an error reply when it receives
the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI.
• If set to "N", the unit will not check the user name part of the
SIP URI in the "To" header.
Default Value N

SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_1, SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_2, …,
SIP_RCV_DET_REQURI_16
Value Format BOOLEAN

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 241

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Description Specifies whether to check ReqURI that is the part of SIP URI in "To"
header when INVITE with wrong target SIP URI is received.
Value Range • Y
• N
Default Value N

SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_1, SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_2, …,
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the "Contact" header to SIP ACK message.
Value Range • Y (Add the "Contact" header)
• N (Do not add the "Contact" header)
Default Value N

VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies how the existence of voice messages is determined when a
"Messages-Waiting: yes" message is received.
Value Range • Y (Determines that voice messages exist when "Messages-
Waiting: yes" is received with a "Voice-Message" line included.)
• N (Determines that voice messages exist when "Messages-
Waiting: yes" is received even without a "Voice-Message" line
included.)
Default Value Y

SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_1, SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_2, …,
SIP_INVITE_EXPIRE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the period, in seconds, in which the INVITE message will
expire.
Value Range 0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)
Default Value 0

SIP_FOVR_NORSP_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1, SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2, …,
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to perform the fail-over process when the unit
detects that the SIP server is not replying to SIP message.

242 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Value Range • Y (Enable fail-over)

• N (Disable fail-over)

Note
• If set to "Y", the unit will try to use the other SIP servers via the
DNS SRV and A records.
• If set to "N", the unit will not try to use the other SIP servers.
Default Value Y

SIP_FOVR_MAX_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_MAX_1, SIP_FOVR_MAX_2, …, SIP_FOVR_MAX_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum number of servers (including the first [normal]
server) used in the fail-over process.
Value Range 1–4
Default Value 2

SIP_FOVR_MODE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_MODE_1, SIP_FOVR_MODE_2, …, SIP_FOVR_MODE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether INVITE/SUBSCRIBE will also follow the
REGISTER Failover result.
Value Range • Y (INVITE/SUBSCRIBE will follow the REGISTER Failover result.)
• N (INVITE/SUBSCRIBE will not follow the REGISTER Failover
result.)
Default Value N

SIP_FOVR_DURATION_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_DURATION_1, SIP_FOVR_DURATION_2, …,
SIP_FOVR_DURATION_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the number of transmission times for the REGISTER
method at the Failover destination.
Value Range 0–255
Default Value 0

SIP_ADD_ROUTE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_ADD_ROUTE_1, SIP_ADD_ROUTE_2, …, SIP_ADD_ROUTE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 243

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Description Specifies whether or not to add Route headers when setting

OutBoundProxy.

Note
• Route headers are not added when OutBoundProxy and other
server settings are the same.
Value Range • Y (Route headers are added)
• N (Route headers are not added)
Default Value Y

SIP_REQURI_PORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_REQURI_PORT_1, SIP_REQURI_PORT_2, …,
SIP_REQURI_PORT_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add the port parameter to the Request-Line in
the initial SIP request.
Value Range • Y (Add the port parameter)
• N (Do not add the port parameter)

Note
• Request URI in REGISTER example:
– If set to "Y", the port parameter is added to the Request-
Line, as follows:
Request-Line: REGISTER sip:192.168.0.10:5060 SIP/2.0
– If set to "N", the port parameter is not added to the Request-
Line, as follows:
Request-Line: REGISTER sip:192.168.0.10 SIP/2.0
Default Value Y

ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_n
Parameter Name Example ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_1, ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_2, …,
ADD_EXPIRES_HEADER_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add an "Expires" header to REGISTER (adds an
"expires" parameter to the "Contact" header).
Value Range • Y (Add Expires Header)
• N (Do not add Expires Header)
Default Value N

ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_n
Parameter Name Example ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_1, ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_2, …,
ADD_TRANSPORT_UDP_16
Value Format BOOLEAN

244 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Description Specifies whether to add the attribute "transport=udp" to the SIP

header URI.
Value Range • Y (Add Transport UDP)
• N (Do not add Transport UDP)
Default Value N

SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_1, SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_2, …,
SIP_ADD_DIVERSION_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to add Diversion header information.
Value Range 0–2
– 0: Do not add Diversion header information
– 1: Use own diversion information only for the Diversion header
– 2: Add diversion information to existing Diversion header
Default Value 0

TRANSFER_RECALL_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the time that the original call is resumed when the
forwarding party does not response by Refer method for call transfer.
Value Range 0, 1–240
Default Value 0

SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_n
Parameter Name Example SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_1, SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_2, …,
SIGNAL_COMPRESSION_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to use signal compression. When using signal
compression, select Required or Supported.
Value Range • 0: Disable
• 1: Enable (Required)
• 2: Enable (Supported)
Default Value 0

MAX_BREADTH_n
Parameter Name Example MAX_BREADTH_1, MAX_BREADTH_2, …, MAX_BREADTH_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the Max Breadth that is max Folk number at Proxy.
Value Range 0–99 (0: Not add max-breadth header)

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 245

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Default Value 60

MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_n
Parameter Name Example MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_1,
MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_2, …,
MUTIPART_BOUNDARY_DELIMITTER_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the strings that indicates the boundary for Multipart Bodies.
Value Range Max. 70 characters
Default Value boundary1

RFC5626_KEEPALIVE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example RFC5626_KEEPALIVE_ENABLE_1,
RFC5626_KEEPALIVE_ENABLE_2, …,
RFC5626_KEEPALIVE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use Keepalive that defined in RFC5626.
Value Range • Y: Enable RFC5626 Keepalive
• N: Disable
Default Value N

RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_1, RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_2,
…, RINGTONE_183_180_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to ring the local ringback tone when 180 is
received after receiving 183 Early media.
Value Range • Y: Performs ringback tone after early media
• N: Does not perform
Default Value N

SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_1, SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_2, …,
SIP_403_REG_SUB_RTX_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether or not to send a request when a 403 Forbidden
reply is received from the server in response to a REGISTER or
SUBSCRIBE.
Value Range • Y (Send)
• N (Do not send)

246 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

Default Value N

SIP_FORK_MODE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_FORK_MODE_1, SIP_FORK_MODE_2, …, SIP_FORK_MODE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use SIP Fork.
Value Range • Y: Use SIP Fork
• N: Not use SIP Fork
Default Value Y

AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_1,
AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_2, …,
AKA_AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use AKA authentication.
Value Range • Y: Use AKA authentication
• N: Not use AKA authentication
Default Value N

RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_1, RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_2, …,
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this
line.
Value Range • Y (Enable RFC 2543 Call Hold)
• N (Disable RFC 2543 Call Hold)

Note
• If set to "Y", the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP when
sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call.
• If set to "N", the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable c=0.0.0.0 Hold (RFC 2543)

SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_1, SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_2, …,
SIP_HOLD_ATTRIBUTE_16
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 247

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Description Specifies whether to set "a=inactive " or not when the call is on hold.
Value Range • 0: send only
• 1: inactive
Default Value 0

SDP_USER_ID_n
Parameter Name Example SDP_USER_ID_1, SDP_USER_ID_2, …, SDP_USER_ID_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the user ID used in the "o=" line field of SDP.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

TELEVENT_PAYLOAD
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.

Note
• This setting is available only when "DTMF_METHOD_n" is set to
"0".
Value Range 96–127
Default Value 101
Web User Interface Reference Telephone-event Payload Type

HOLD_SOUND_PATH_n
Parameter Name Example HOLD_SOUND_PATH_1, HOLD_SOUND_PATH_2, …,
HOLD_SOUND_PATH_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether the unit’s hold tone or the network server’s hold
tone (Music on hold) is played when a party is put on hold.

Note
• It is necessary to set the following parameters to play the unit’s
hold tone.
– HOLD_TONE_FRQ
– HOLD_TONE_GAIN
Value Range 0–1
– 0: The unit’s hold tone is played.
– 1: The network server’s hold tone (Music on hold) is played.
Default Value 0

248 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.22 SIP Settings

KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_n
Parameter Name Example KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_1, KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_2, …,
KEEP_EARLYMEDIA_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to continue Early Media call or not when 18x
without SDP is received after Early Media connection is established
while making a call.
Value Range • Y: Continues
• N: Does not continue (Switch to ringback tone)
Default Value N

RFC3327_SUPPORT_PATH
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add "supported: path" to support Path header.
Value Range • Y: Adds supported: path
• N: Does not add
Default Value Y

RFC4244_SUPPORT_HISTORY
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add "supported: history" to support History info
header.
Value Range • Y: Adds supported: history
• N: Does not add
Default Value N

RFC3319_SUPPORT_JOIN
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add "supported: join" to support join header.
Value Range • Y: Adds supported: join
• N: Does not add
Default Value N

RFC6947_DRAFT08_ALTC
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to support RFC6947 draft08 when the attvalue is
not attached after altc.
Value Range • Y: Performs ALTC by Draft08
• N: Performs ALTC by RFC6947

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 249

5.3.22 SIP Settings

Default Value Y

RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_n
Parameter Name Example RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_1, RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_2, …,
RFC5627_SUPPORT_GRUU_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to add "supported: gruu" to support join header.
Value Range • Y: Adds supported: gruu
• N: Does not add
Default Value N

ESCAPECODE_CONVERSION
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to convert "#" code to "%23".
Value Range • Y: Convert "#" code to "%23"
• N: Does not convert
Default Value Y

SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_1, SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_2, …,
SIP_REPLACE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use "Replaces Header".
Value Range • Y: Use "Replaces Header"
• N: Do not use"Replaces Header"
Default Value Y

SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_1, SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_2,
…, SIP_INC_INVITE_RTP_MODE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to send RTP after receiving a second INVITE.
Value Range • 0: Start receiving RTP after receiving a second INVITE
• 1: Start sending/receiving RTP after receiving a second INVITE
Default Value 0

250 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings

5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings

SIP_TRANSPORT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TRANSPORT_1, SIP_TRANSPORT_2, …, SIP_TRANSPORT_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP
packets.
Value Range • 0 (UDP)
• 1 (TCP)
• 2 (TLS)
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Transport Protocol

SIP_TLS_MODE_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TLS_MODE_1, SIP_TLS_MODE_2, …, SIP_TLS_MODE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the secure SIP protocol.
Value Range • 0: SIPS
• 1: SIP-TLS
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference TLS Mode

SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_1, SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_2, …,
SIP_TLS_RECONNECT_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to perform TLS reconnect after TLS session is
disconnected.
Value Range • Y: Performs TLS connection automatically
• N: Does not perform
Default Value Y

SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,
SIP_TLS_SRV_PREFIX_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TLS.
Value Range Max. 32 characters

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 251

5.3.23 SIP-TLS Settings

Default Value _sips._tcp.

Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for TLS

SIP_TLS_VERIFY_n
Parameter Name Example SIP_TLS_VERIFY_1, SIP_TLS_VERIFY_2, …,
SIP_TLS_VERIFY_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
Value Range • 0: No verification
• 1: Simple verification
• 2: Precise verification
Default Value 0

SIP_TLS_ROOT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the root certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

SIP_TLS_CLIENT_CERT_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the client certificate is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

SIP_TLS_PKEY_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI where the private key is stored.
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

252 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.24 CODEC Settings

SIP_TLS_RANDOM_PORT
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to assign a random port (ephemeral port) number
or a static port number.

Note
• All lines that use SIP-TLS are defined by this parameter.
• UDP/TCP ports are unaffected by this parameter.
Value Range • Y: Assign a random TLS port number
• N: Assign a static TLS port number (Refer to SIP_SRC_PORT_n)
Default Value Y

5.3.24 CODEC Settings

CODEC_G729_PARAM_n
Parameter Name Example CODEC_G729_PARAM_1, CODEC_G729_PARAM_2, …,
CODEC_G729_PARAM_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to add an attribute line, "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no", to
SDP when the codec is set to "G729A".
Value Range • 0: Do not add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no"
• 1: Add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no"
Default Value 0

CODEC_ENABLEx_n
Parameter Name Example CODEC_ENABLEx_1, CODEC_ENABLEx_2, …, CODEC_ENABLEx_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the codec specified in the parameter list.

Note
• The "x" character in the parameter title should be changed to
one of the following numbers, according to the codec to be
changed.
– 0: G.722
– 1: PCMA
– 3: G.729A
– 4: PCMU
• For codec setting examples, see 2.5.1 Examples of Codec
Settings.
Value Range • Y (Enable)
• N (Disable)

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 253

5.3.25 DTMF Settings

Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference • G.722 Enable
• PCMA Enable
• G.729A Enable
• PCMU Enable

CODEC_PRIORITYx_n
Parameter Name Example CODEC_PRIORITYx_1, CODEC_PRIORITYx_2, …,
CODEC_PRIORITYx_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the priority order for the codec.

Note
• The "x" character in the parameter title should be changed to
one of the following numbers, according to the codec to be
changed.
– 0: G.722
– 1: PCMA
– 3: G.729A
– 4: PCMU
• For codec setting examples, see 2.5.1 Examples of Codec
Settings.
Value Range 1–255
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference • G.722 Priority
• PCMA Priority
• G.729A Priority
• PCMU Priority

CODEC_G711_REQ
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether to automatically select "PCMU" as the codec when a
codec other than "PCMU" is selected.
Value Range • 0: Do not set "PCMU"
• 1: Set "PCMU"
Default Value 1

5.3.25 DTMF Settings

DTMF_METHOD_n
Parameter Name Example DTMF_METHOD_1, DTMF_METHOD_2, …, DTMF_METHOD_16

254 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.25 DTMF Settings

Value Format INTEGER

Description Specifies the method to notify the DTMF.
Value Range • 0: RFC2833
• 1: Inband
• 2: SIP INFO

Note
• RFC2833 refers to Outband DTMF.
• Inband refers to Inband DTMF.
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference DTMF Type

OUTBANDDTMF_VOL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the volume (in decibels [dB]) of the DTMF tone using RFC
2833.
Value Range -63–0
Default Value -5

INBANDDTMF_VOL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the volume (in decibels [dB]) of in-band DTMF tones.
Value Range -46–0
Default Value -5

DTMF_SIGNAL_LEN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of the DTMF signal, in milliseconds.
Value Range 60–200
Default Value 180

DTMF_INTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between DTMF signals.
Value Range 60–200
Default Value 90

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 255

5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings

5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings

DSCP_RTP_n
Parameter Name Example DSCP_RTP_1, DSCP_RTP_2, …, DSCP_RTP_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets.
Value Range 0–63
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)

DSCP_RTCP_n
Parameter Name Example DSCP_RTCP_1, DSCP_RTCP_2, …, DSCP_RTCP_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTCP/RTCP-XR
packets.
Value Range 0–63
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference RTCP Packet QoS (DSCP)

MAX_DELAY_n
Parameter Name Example MAX_DELAY_1, MAX_DELAY_2, …, MAX_DELAY_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter
buffer.
Value Range 3–50 (× 10 ms)

Note
• This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than "NOM_DELAY"
– This value must be greater than "MIN_DELAY"
– "NOM_DELAY" must be greater than or equal to
"MIN_DELAY"
Default Value 20

MIN_DELAY_n
Parameter Name Example MIN_DELAY_1, MIN_DELAY_2, …, MIN_DELAY_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the minimum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter
buffer.

256 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings

Value Range 1 or 2 (× 10 ms)

Note
• This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be less than or equal to "NOM_DELAY"
– This value must be less than "MAX_DELAY"
– "MAX_DELAY" must be greater than "NOM_DELAY"
Default Value 2

NOM_DELAY_n
Parameter Name Example NOM_DELAY_1, NOM_DELAY_2, …, NOM_DELAY_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the initial delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range 1–7 (× 10 ms)

Note
• This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than or equal to "MIN_DELAY"
– This value must be less than "MAX_DELAY"
Default Value 1

RTP_PORT_MIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP
packets.
Value Range 1024–59598 (only even)
Default Value 16000
Web User Interface Reference Minimum RTP Port Number

RTP_PORT_MAX
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP
packets.
Value Range 1424–59998 (only even)
Default Value 20000
Web User Interface Reference Maximum RTP Port Number

RTP_PTIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP
packets.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 257

5.3.26 RTP/RTCP/RTCP-XR Settings

Value Range • 20
• 30
• 40
• 60
Default Value 20
Web User Interface Reference RTP Packet Time

RTP_TARGET_CHECK
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the diagnose level for received RTP.
Value Range • 0: diagnose destination IP Address and port
• 1: diagnose destination IP address
• 2: diagnose destination port
• 3: diagnose nothing
Default Value 0

RTCP_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example RTCP_ENABLE_1, RTCP_ENABLE_2, …, RTCP_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable RTCP (Real-Time Transport
Control Protocol). For details, refer to RFC 3550.
Value Range • Y (Enable RTCP)
• N (Disable RTCP)
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable RTCP

RTCP_INTVL_n
Parameter Name Example RTCP_INTVL_1, RTCP_INTVL_2, …, RTCP_INTVL_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP/RTCP-XR packets.
Value Range 5–65535
Default Value 5
Web User Interface Reference RTCP&RTCP-XR Interval

RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_n
Parameter Name Example RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_1, RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_2, …,
RTCP_SEND_BY_SDP_16
Value Format INTEGER

258 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.27 SRTP Settings

Description Specifies whether to send RTCP signals by SDP (Session

Description Protocol).
Value Range 0–1
– 0: Send RTCP signals using the value specified in
"RTCP_INTVL_n", if the "RTCP_ENABLE_n" parameter is enabled.
– 1: Send RTCP signals using the value specified in the SDP
attribute "a=rtcp:".
Default Value 0

RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_1, RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_2, …,
RTP_CLOSE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable processing to close held RTP sockets.
Value Range • Y (Enable RTP Close)
• N (Disable RTP Close)
Default Value N

RTCPXR_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example RTCPXR_ENABLE_1, RTCPXR_ENABLE_2, …, RTCPXR_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable RTCP-XR.
Value Range • Y: Enable RTCP-XR
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable RTCP-XR

5.3.27 SRTP Settings

SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_n
Parameter Name Example SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_1, SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_2, …,
SRTP_CONNECT_MODE_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the mode of SRTP feature.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 259

5.3.27 SRTP Settings

Value Range • 0: SRTP

• 1: RTP/SRTP
• 2: SRTP&RTP(Panasonic PBX only)

Note
• 0: Use only SRTP for outgoing and incoming calls.
• 1: Use only RTP for outgoing calls, and RTP or SRTP for
incoming calls.
• 2: Use RTP or SRTP for both outgoing and incoming calls.
This value is valid only when the unit is connected to a
Panasonic PBX. "SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n" must
also be set to "Y".
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference SRTP Mode

SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_1,
SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_2, …,
SRTP_MIX_CONFERENCE_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to allow conferences where each participant can
use either SRTP or RTP.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Conference

SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_1,
SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_2, …,
SRTP_MIX_TRANSFER_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to allow call transfers between a user who is using
SRTP and a user who is using RTP.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Mixed SRTP & RTP by Transfer

SRTP_HELD_CALL_RTP_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN

260 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH

Description Specifies whether to allow playing the melody on hold over RTP on a
call that is using SRTP.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH

VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_ADDRESS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the collector server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Server Address

VQREPORT_COLLECTOR_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the collector server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060
Web User Interface Reference Port

VQREPORT_SEND
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the sending type of the VQ report using PUBLISH.
Value Range • 0: Disable
• 1: End of Session Report Using PUBLISH
• 2: Interval report Using PUBLISH
• 3: Alert Report Using PUBLISH
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Enable PUBLISH

ALERT_REPORT_TRIGGER
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the trigger to notify the VQ report.
Value Range • 0: Warning
• 1: Critical
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Alert Report Trigger

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 261

5.3.28 VQ Report by PUBLISH

ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_CRITICAL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the critical criteria to send VQ report at the time of occurring
the MOSQ.
Value Range 0–40
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Threshold MOS-LQ (Critical)

ALERT_REPORT_MOSQ_WARNING
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the warning criteria to send VQ report at the time of
occurring the MOSQ.
Value Range 0–40
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Threshold MOS-LQ (Warning)

ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_CRITICAL
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the critical criteria to send VQ report at the time of occurring
the delay.
Value Range 0–2000
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Threshold Delay (Critical)

ALERT_REPORT_DELAY_WARNING
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the warning criteria to send VQ report at the time of
occurring the delay.
Value Range 0–2000
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Threshold Delay (Warning)

VQREPORT_SIGNAL_COMPRESSION
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use signal compression for sending VQ report.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

262 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings

5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings

UACSTA_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example UACSTA_ENABLE_1, UACSTA_ENABLE_2, …, UACSTA_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the uaCSTA feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

UACSTA_UNIQUE_ID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the SIP-URI for registering to CSTA server.
Value Range Max. 64 characters
Default Value Empty string

CSTA_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for uaCSTA
communication.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 6060

CSTA_PRXY_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server for CSTA.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

CSTA_PRXY_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the proxy server for CSTA.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060

CSTA_RGSTR_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the registrar server for CSTA.
Value Range Max. 256 characters

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 263

5.3.29 uaCSTA Settings

Default Value Empty string

CSTA_RGSTR_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of the registrar server for CSTA.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 5060

CSTA_REG_EXPIRE_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER
request for CSTA.
Value Range 1–4294967295
Default Value 3600

CSTA_TRANSPORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP
packets.
Value Range • 0: UDP
• 1: TCP
• 2: TLS
Default Value 0

CSTA_RGSTR_AUTHID
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication ID for received REGISTER.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string

CSTA_RGSTR_PASS
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the authentication password for received REGISTER.
Value Range Max. 128 characters
Default Value Empty string

264 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.30 Telephone Settings

5.3.30 Telephone Settings

POWER_ON_DISPLAY_LOGO_PATH
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies URI for logo image file displayed when power is turned on.

Note
• Size: 480 × 272
• File type: JPEG, PNG, BMP, GIF
Value Range Max. 384 characters

Note
• For details about the formats, see 2.1.3 Server Address
Formats.
Default Value Empty string

FIRSTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which the first digits of
a dial number must be dialed.
Value Range 1–600 (s)
Default Value 30
Web User Interface Reference First-digit Timeout

INTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent
digits of a dial number must be dialed.
Value Range 1–15 (s)
Default Value 5
Web User Interface Reference Inter-digit Timeout

POUND_KEY_DELIMITER_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the # key is treated as a regular dialed digit or a
delimiter, when dialed as or after the second digit.
Value Range • Y (# is treated as the end of dialing delimiter)
• N (# is treated as a regular dialed digit)
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable # Key as delimiter

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 265

5.3.30 Telephone Settings

RINGTONE_SETTING_n
Parameter Name Example RINGTONE_SETTING_1, RINGTONE_SETTING_2, …,
RINGTONE_SETTING_16
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the ringtone to each line for a unit.
Value Range 1–32
Default Value RINGTONE_SETTING_1=1, RINGTONE_SETTING_2=2,
RINGTONE_SETTING_3=3, RINGTONE_SETTING_4=4,
RINGTONE_SETTING_5=5, RINGTONE_SETTING_6=6,
RINGTONE_SETTING_7=7, RINGTONE_SETTING_8=8,
RINGTONE_SETTING_9=1, RINGTONE_SETTING_10=2,
RINGTONE_SETTING_11=3, RINGTONE_SETTING_12=4,
RINGTONE_SETTING_13=5, RINGTONE_SETTING_14=6,
RINGTONE_SETTING_15=7, RINGTONE_SETTING_16=8

DISPLAY_NAME_REPLACE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the name saved in the phonebook is used in place
of the name display if a matching entry is found.
Value Range • Y (Enable Display Name Replace)
• N (Disable Display Name Replace)
Default Value Y

NUMBER_MATCHING_LOWER_DIGIT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the minimum number of digits with which to match a
phonebook entry with an incoming call’s caller ID.
Value Range 0–15
Default Value 7

NUMBER_MATCHING_UPPER_DIGIT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the maximum number of digits with which to match a
phonebook entry with an incoming call’s caller ID.
Value Range 0–15
Default Value 10

FLASH_RECALL_TERMINATE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a
conversation.

266 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.30 Telephone Settings

Value Range • Y (Terminate)

• N (EFA)
Default Value Y

FLASHHOOK_CONTENT_TYPE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the type of signal sent when sending a flash hook event.
Value Range • Signal
• flashhook
Default Value Signal

NUM_PLAN_PARKING
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the call parking number.
Value Range 0–4 digits (0–9,*, #)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Call Park Number

CALLPARK_KEY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to display "Call Park" in the Call Parking Func
menu.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Call Park Key

NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVING
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the park retrieve number.
Value Range 0–4 digits (0–9,*, #)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Park Retrieve Number

HOLD_RECALL_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the duration of the hold recall timer. If set to "0", the function
is disabled.
Value Range 0–240 (0: Disable)

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 267

5.3.30 Telephone Settings

Default Value 60

HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to transfer a call by Hold button.
Value Range • Y: Enable (Press the Hold button to transfer a call.)
talk → hold → 2nd talk → Transfer (or on-hook)
• N: Disable (Press the Transfer button to transfer a call.)
talk → transfer → 2nd talk → transfer (or on-hook)
Default Value N

ONHOOK_TRANSFER_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable on hook transfer when
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION="N".
Value Range • Y (Enable On-hook Transfer)
• N (Disable On-hook Transfer)
Default Value Y

ONHOOK_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable on hook transfer when
HOLD_TRANSFER_OPERATION="Y".
Value Range • Y (Enable On-hook Transfer)
• N (Disable On-hook Transfer)
Default Value N

BLIND_TRANSFER_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable blind transfer.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

SYS_LOCK_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable locking the unit.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable

268 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.30 Telephone Settings

Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable IP Phone Lock

SYS_LOCK_PASSWORD
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the password for unlocking the unit.
Value Range Null, 4 digits (0–9)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Password for Unlocking

PAUSE_INPUT_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable pause input.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N

NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the feature number assigned to a BLF for performing call
pickup.
Value Range 0–4 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Directed Call Pickup

DISP_NUM_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the number of remaining items is displayed when a
new item is registered in phonebook.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

WALLPAPER_WAIT_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the time, in seconds, to wait for the screen saver to display.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 269

5.3.30 Telephone Settings

Value Range • 0 (Do not display the screen saver)

• 10
• 30
• 60
• 180
• 300
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Wait Time

CNIP_FROM_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to use the "FROM" header or the "PAI" header in
CNIP (Calling Number Identification Presentation).
Value Range • Y: Use "FROM" header
• N: Use "PAI" header
Default Value N

IDLE_DISPLAY_TYPE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies what is shown on the display in standby mode.
Value Range • 0: Off
• 1: Phone Number
• 2: Phone Number and Name
• 3: Name

Note
• "Name" is the display name for the line.
Default Value 3

BLF_DISPLAY_OFF_OUTGOING
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to display the phone numbers of BLF keys or PAI
after dialing.
Value Range • Y: Do not display
• N: Display the phone numbers
Default Value N

SPLIT_HOLD_TRNS_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN

270 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings

Description Specifies whether to enable the Call Split feature by pressing the hold
key while a call is either on transfer hold or conference hold.
Value Range • Y: Enable the Call Split feature by using the hold key
• N: Disable
Default Value N

5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings

FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx
Parameter Name Example FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT1,
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT2, …,
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT24
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–24
Specifies a particular Facility Action for the flexible key. No facility
action will be taken for the button if the string is empty or invalid.

Note
• If this parameter is specified, "FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx"
should be an empty string.
Value Range X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ONETOUCH,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ACD,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_WRAPUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLF,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINESTATUS,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_FORWARD,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PHONEBOOK,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLLOG,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARARING,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_HOTELING,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_TRANSFER,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLINDTRANSFER,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CONFERENCE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_DIRECTPICKUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLPARK,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARKRETRIEVE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_NETWORKCAMERA,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_APPLICATION,
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Type

FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx
Parameter Name Example FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARG1,
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARG2, …,
FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARG24

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 271

5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings

Value Format STRING

Description x=1–24
Specifies an optional argument associated with the specified Facility
Action for the flexible key.
Value Range Max. 35 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Parameter

FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx
Parameter Name Example FLEX_BUTTON_LABEL1,
FLEX_BUTTON_LABEL2, …,
FLEX_BUTTON_LABEL24
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–24
Specifies the name of flexible key to be displayed on the screen.
Value Range Max. 20 characters

Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Label Name

FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx
Parameter Name Example FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIAL1,
FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIAL2, …,
FLEX_BUTTON_QUICK_DIAL24
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–24
Specifies a quick dial destination number to be used for the flexible
key.
Value Range Max. 32 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value Empty string

LONG_PRESS_KEY_SETTING_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the DSS key with a long press.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

272 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.32 DSS Key Settings

5.3.32 DSS Key Settings

DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx
Parameter Name Example DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT1,
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT2, …,
DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACT200
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–200
Specifies a particular Facility Action for the flexible key. No facility
action will be taken for the button if the string is empty or invalid.

Note
• If this parameter is specified, "DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx"
should be an empty string.
Value Range X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ONETOUCH,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_ACD,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_WRAPUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLF,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_LINESTATUS,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_FORWARD,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PHONEBOOK,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLLOG,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARARING,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_HOTELING,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_TRANSFER,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_BLINDTRANSFER,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CONFERENCE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_DIRECTPICKUP,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_CALLPARK,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_PARKRETRIEVE,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_NETWORKCAMERA,
X_PANASONIC_IPTEL_APPLICATION,
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Type

DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx
Parameter Name Example DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARG1, DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARG2,
…,DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARG200
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–200
Specifies an optional argument associated with the specified Facility
Action for the flexible key.
Value Range Max. 35 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Parameter

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 273

5.3.33 Tone Settings

DSS_BUTTON_LABELx
Parameter Name Example DSS_BUTTON_LABEL1, DSS_BUTTON_LABEL2, …,
DSS_BUTTON_LABEL200
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–200
Specifies the name of flexible key to be displayed on the screen.
Value Range Max. 20 characters

Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Label Name

DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIALx
Parameter Name Example DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIAL1, DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIAL2, …,
DSS_BUTTON_QUICK_DIAL200
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–200
Specifies a quick dial destination number to be used for the flexible
key.
Value Range Max. 32 digits(0–9, *, #)
Default Value Empty string

5.3.33 Tone Settings

OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Second Dial Tone
using max. 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000(Hz) (0=No tone)
Default Value 420

OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Second Dial Tone
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether Second Dial Tone is repeated.

274 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.33 Tone Settings

Value Range • 0: No Repeat

• 1: Repeat
Default Value 0

OUTSIDE_DIAL_TONE_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Second Dial Tone using Max.
10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.
Value Range 0–16000 (msec) (0=Continuous)
Default Value 60,0

CONFIRMATION_TONE5_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the confirmation tone 5 frequencies, in hertz, of
confirmation tone 5 using Max. 2 whole numbers separated by a
comma.
Value Range 200–2000 Hz (0: no tone)
Default Value 1000

CONFIRMATION_TONE5_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of confirmation tone 5.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

REORDER_TONE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable reorder tone.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

TONE_LEN_DISCONNECT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the duration, in seconds, that a disconnect tone will be
heard when the other party ends a call and the unit is being used.
Value Range 1–15 (s)
Default Value 3

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 275

5.3.33 Tone Settings

DIAL_TONE1_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Dial Tone 1 using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 350,440
Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies

DIAL_TONE1_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Dial Tone 1.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

DIAL_TONE1_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether Dial Tone 1 is repeated.
Value Range 0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
Default Value 0

DIAL_TONE1_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Dial Tone 1 using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (msec) (0=Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,0
Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings

DIAL_TONE2_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Dial Tone 2 using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.

276 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.33 Tone Settings

Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)

Default Value 350,440

DIAL_TONE2_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Dial Tone 2.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

DIAL_TONE2_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether Dial Tone 2 is repeated.
Value Range 0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
Default Value 0

DIAL_TONE2_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Dial Tone 2 using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Infinite time)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,0

DIAL_TONE4_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of Dial Tone 4 (stutter
dial tones) to notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole
numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 350,440
Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies

DIAL_TONE4_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 277

5.3.33 Tone Settings

Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of Dial Tone 4 (stutter-type dial tone).
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

DIAL_TONE4_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether Dial Tone 4 (stutter-type dial tone) is repeated.
Value Range 0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
Default Value 0

DIAL_TONE4_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of Dial Tone 4 (stutter dial
tones) to notify that a voice mail is waiting, using up to 22 whole
numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 560 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 560,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,10
0,100,100,100,100,100,0
Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings

BUSY_TONE_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 480,620
Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies

BUSY_TONE_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the busy tone.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)

278 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.33 Tone Settings

Default Value 0

BUSY_TONE_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether the busy tone is repeated.
Value Range 0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
Default Value 1

BUSY_TONE_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,500,440
Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings

REORDER_TONE_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 480,620
Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies

REORDER_TONE_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the reorder tone.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

REORDER_TONE_RPT
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 279

5.3.33 Tone Settings

Description Specifies whether the reorder tone is repeated.

Value Range 0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat
Default Value 1

REORDER_TONE_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using up to 10
whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,250,190
Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings

RINGBACK_TONE_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using
2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 440,480
Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies

RINGBACK_TONE_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the ringback tone.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

RINGBACK_TONE_RPT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether the ringback tone is repeated.
Value Range 0–1
– 0: No Repeat
– 1: Repeat

280 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.33 Tone Settings

Default Value 1

RINGBACK_TONE_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using up to
10 whole numbers (off 1, on 1, off 2, on 2…) separated by commas.

Note
• It is recommended that you set a value of 60 milliseconds or
more for the first value (off 1).
Value Range 0–16000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 60,2000,3940
Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings

HOLD_ALARM_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of the hold alarm using
2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 425

HOLD_ALARM_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the hold alarm.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

CW_TONE1_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of call waiting tone 1
using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 425

CW_TONE1_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of call waiting tone 1.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 281

5.3.33 Tone Settings

Default Value 0

HOLD_TONE_FRQ
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of the hold tone using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range 0, 200–2000 (0: No tone)
Default Value 425

HOLD_TONE_GAIN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the gain, in decibels, of the hold tone.
Value Range -24–24 (dB)
Default Value 0

BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 1, described in
the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated
by commas.
Value Range 0–5000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 2000,4000

BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 2, described in
the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated
by commas.
Value Range 0–5000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 800,400,800,4000

BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer

282 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.33 Tone Settings

Description Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 3, described in

the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated
by commas.
Value Range 0–5000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 400,200,400,200,800,4000

BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 4, described in
the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated
by commas.
Value Range 0–5000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 300,200,1000,200,300,4000

BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING
Value Format Comma-separated Integer
Description Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 5, described in
the LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section
14, using up to 8 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2…) separated
by commas.
Value Range 0–5000 (0: Continuous)

Note
• Avoid setting 1–50 for any of the values.
Default Value 500

KEY_PAD_TONE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies whether a tone is heard in response to key presses.
Value Range • 0: Off
• 1: On
Default Value 1

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 283

5.3.34 Call Control Settings

5.3.34 Call Control Settings

DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the line used to make an outgoing call when no line is
specified in the dialing operation.
Value Range • 1: Line1
• 2: Line2
• 3: Line3
• 4: Line4
• 5: Line5
• 6: Line6
• 7: Line7
• 8: Line8
• 9: Line9
• 10: Line10
• 11: Line11
• 12: Line12
• 13: Line13
• 14: Line14
• 15: Line15
• 16: Line16
Default Value 1
Web User Interface Reference Default Line for Outgoing

ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_1, ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_2, …,
ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to make calls without transmitting the phone
number to the called party.
Value Range • Y: Enable anonymous call
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Anonymous Call

284 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.34 Call Control Settings

BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_1,
BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_2, …,
BLOCK_ANONYMOUS_CALL_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to accept or reject the incoming call without the
called party’s phone number.
Value Range • Y: Enable anonymous call block
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Block Anonymous Call

HOTLINE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Hot line feature.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable

HOTLINE_NUMBER
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the Hot line number.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Hotline Number

HOTLINE_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies a time after off hook for Hot line.
Value Range 0–10 (s)
Default Value 2
Web User Interface Reference Hotline Delay

DISPLAY_NAME_n
Parameter Name Example DISPLAY_NAME_1, DISPLAY_NAME_2, …, DISPLAY_NAME_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone
when you make a call.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 285

5.3.34 Call Control Settings

Value Range Max. 24 characters

Note
• You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Display Name

VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail
server.

Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range • Y (Send the SUBSCRIBE request)
• N (Do not send the SUBSCRIBE request)
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server

VM_NUMBER_n
Parameter Name Example VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2, …, VM_NUMBER_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.

Note
• Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Voice Mail Access Number

VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_n
Parameter Name Example VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_1, VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_2, …,
VM_SUBSCRIBE_SPECIFIC_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the defined name of a voice mail box.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

DIAL_PLAN_n
Parameter Name Example DIAL_PLAN_1, DIAL_PLAN_2, …, DIAL_PLAN_16
Value Format STRING

286 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.34 Call Control Settings

Description Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control
which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making
a call. For details, see 6.2 Dial Plan.
Value Range Max. 1000 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Dial Plan (max 1000 columns)

DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_1,
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_2, …,
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable dial plan filtering so that a call is not
made when the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats
specified in "DIAL_PLAN_n".
Value Range • Y (Enable dial plan filtering)
• N (Disable dial plan filtering)

Note
• If set to "Y", the dialed number will not be sent to the line when
the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial
formats specified in the dial plan.
• If set to "N", the dialed number will be sent to the line, even if
the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial
formats specified in the dial plan.
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match

MACRODIGIT_TIM
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits when a "T"
or "t" has been entered in the dial plan.
Value Range 1–15
Default Value 5
Web User Interface Reference Timer for Dial Plan

INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first "+" symbol
when the phone number for incoming international calls contains "+".

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 287

5.3.34 Call Control Settings

Value Range Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Note
• No other characters are allowed.
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference International Call Prefix

COUNTRY_CALLING_CODE
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the country/area calling code to be used for comparative
purposes when dialing a number from the incoming call log that
contains a "+" symbol.
Value Range Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Country Calling Code

NATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
Value Format STRING
Description When dialing a number from the incoming call log that contains a "+"
symbol and the country calling code matches, the country calling
code is removed and the national access code is added.
Value Range Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference National Access Code

ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies admin rights.

Note
If you attempt to configure System Settings without enabling
admin rights, an error will occur and configuration will not be
possible.
Value Range • Y: Admin
• N: Non Admin
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable Admin Ability

EMERGENCY_CALLx
Parameter Name Example EMERGENCY_CALL1, EMERGENCY_CALL2, …, EMERGENCY_CALL5
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the emergency number. (Up to 5 emergency numbers)

288 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.34 Call Control Settings

Value Range Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference 1–5

CALL_REJECTIONx
Parameter Name Example CALL_REJECTION1, CALL_REJECTION2, …, CALL_REJECTION30
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the rejected number per line. (Up to 30 rejected numbers)
Value Range Max. 32 characters (except &, ", ', :, ;, <, >)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference 1–30

CLICKTO_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CLICKTO_ENABLE_1, CLICKTO_ENABLE_2, …,
CLICKTO_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable Click to Dial/Answer/Hold
functions.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Click to Call

CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_1,
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_2, …,
CALLPARK_NOTIFICATION_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to respond to call park notifications from the server.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Call Park Notification

SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1, SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_2, …,
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 289

5.3.34 Call Control Settings

Description Specifies whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server,
which is used to share one line among the units.

Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Value Range • Y (Enable shared call)
• N (Disable shared call)

Note
• If set to "Y", the SIP server will control the line by using a
shared-call signaling method.
• If set to "N", the SIP server will control the line by using a
standard signaling method.
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Shared Call

SHARED_STOP_LINE_SEIZE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to stop seizing the Shared Call line at the unit side.
Value Range • Y: Stop seizing the line
• N: Seize the line
Default Value N

FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_1, FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_2,
…, FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call
Forward settings, configured via the Web user interface or phone
user interface, between the unit and the portal server that is provided
by your phone system dealer/service provider.

Note
• Even if you specify "Y", this feature may not function properly if
your phone system does not support it. Before you configure
this setting, consult your phone system dealer/service provider.
Value Range • Y (Enable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization)
• N (Disable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization)
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Key Synchronization (Enable Key Synchronisation)

290 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.34 Call Control Settings

FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_n
Parameter Name Example FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_1,
FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_2, …,
FWD_SYNCHRO_FORCE_DISABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to synchronize the Call Forward settings in
"FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n".
Value Range • Y: Do not synchronize
• N: Synchronize
Default Value N

CONF_SERVER_HOLD_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to hold the call when connecting an N-party
conference.
Value Range • Y: Hold the call
• N: Do not hold the call
Default Value N

MOH_SERVER_URI_n
Parameter Name Example MOH_SERVER_URI_1, MOH_SERVER_URI_2, …,
MOH_SERVER_URI_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies MoH server URI for each line.
Value Range Max. 384 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference MoH Server URI

BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_1,
BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_2, …,
BS_EXECUTIVE_SETTING_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the Executive Call Filtering
feature of the selected line.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Executive Setting

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 291

5.3.34 Call Control Settings

BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_1,
BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_2, …,
BS_ASSISTANT_SETTING_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the Executive-Assistant Call Filtering
feature and Executive-Assistant Divert feature of the selected line.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value N
Web User Interface Reference Enable Assistant Setting

FWD_DND_CONTROL_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether to enable the telephone for FWD/DND.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y

FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_MODE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the mode of FWD/DND synchronizing with server.
Value Range • 1: as feature event
• 2: Panasonic original
• 3: Entel
Default Value 1

HOLD_AND_CALL_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether making new call after holding the call or not.
Value Range • Y: Enable (Hold and Call)
• N: Disable (Hold)
Default Value N

AUTO_CALL_HOLD
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether calls are disconnected or held when an other line is
selected while having a conversation.

292 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.34 Call Control Settings

Value Range • Y (Enable Auto Call Hold)

• N (Disable Auto Call Hold)
Default Value Y

SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_DND
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the response code when a call is received in Do Not Disturb
mode.
Value Range 400–699
Default Value 403

SIP_RESPONSE_CODE_CALL_REJECT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the response code when a call is rejected.
Value Range 400–699
Default Value 603

CW_ENABLE_n
Parameter Name Example CW_ENABLE_1, CW_ENABLE_2, …, CW_ENABLE_16
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether automatic call waiting is enabled.
Value Range • Y (Enable Call Waiting)
• N (Disable Call Waiting)
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Enable Call Waiting

RETURN_VOL_SET_DEFAULT_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN
Description Specifies whether the volume is returned to its default setting after
each call.
Value Range • Y (Volume returns to the default setting after each call)
• N (Volume does not change after each call)
Default Value N

CONFERENCE_SERVER_URI
Value Format STRING

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 293

5.3.35 Video Communication Settings

Description Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of "sip:", a
user part, the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,
"sip:[email protected]".

Note
• Availability depends on your phone system.
Value Range Max. 256 characters (except ", &, ', :, ;, <, >, and space)
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Conference Server URI

RESOURCELIST_URI_n
Parameter Name Example RESOURCELIST_URI_1, RESOURCELIST_URI_2, …,
RESOURCELIST_URI_16
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the URI for the resource list, which consists of "sip:", a user
part, the "@" symbol, and a host part.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Resource List URI

5.3.35 Video Communication Settings

DEFAULT_CALL_MODE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the default call type when you make a call by going off
hook, etc.
Value Range • 0: Voice
• 1: Video
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Default Call Mode

VIDEO_SCREEN_MODE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the mode for the video screen.
Value Range • 0: Normal
• 1: Split
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Screen Mode

VIDEO_SEND_IMAGE_ENABLE
Value Format BOOLEAN

294 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.35 Video Communication Settings

Description Specifies whether the video is automatically sent when you start a
video call.
Value Range • Y: Enable
• N: Disable
Default Value Y
Web User Interface Reference Send Image at Start

VIDEO_BIT_RATE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the bit rate for the video when you make a video call.
Value Range • 0: 128
• 1: 256
• 2: 384
• 3: 512
• 4: 768
• 5: 1024
• 6: 2048
Default Value 6
Web User Interface Reference Bit Rate

VIDEO_BIT_RATE_USE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Selects whether the specified bit rate is treated as the maximum bit
rate or a fixed bit rate.
Value Range • 0: Maximum
• 1: Fixed
Default Value 0
Web User Interface Reference Bit Rate Use

VIDEO_FRAME_RATE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the frame rate for the video when you make a video call.
Value Range • 15: 15
• 30: 30
Default Value 30
Web User Interface Reference Frame Rate

VIDEO_IMAGE_SIZE
Value Format INTEGER

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 295

5.3.36 Network Camera Settings

Description Specifies the size for video images when you make a video call.
Value Range • 0: QCIF
• 1: QVGA
• 2: CIF
• 3: HVGAW
• 4: VGA
Default Value 3
Web User Interface Reference Image Size

H264_PAYLOAD
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the payload size for H.264.
Value Range 96–125
Default Value 102

5.3.36 Network Camera Settings

NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAME1, NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAME2, …,
NWCAMERA_DISPLAY_NAME16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the name of the Network Camera to be displayed in the
Network Camera viewer.
Value Range Max. 20 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_ADDRx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_ADDR1, NWCAMERA_ADDR2, …,
NWCAMERA_ADDR16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the address of the Network Camera.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_PORTx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_PORT1, NWCAMERA_PORT2, …,
NWCAMERA_PORT16
Value Format INTEGER

296 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.36 Network Camera Settings

Description x=1–16
Specifies the port of the Network Camera.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 80

NWCAMERA_USER_IDx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_USER_ID1, NWCAMERA_USER_ID2, …,
NWCAMERA_USER_ID16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the user ID to connect to the Network Camera.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_PASSx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_PASS1, NWCAMERA_PASS2, …,
NWCAMERA_PASS16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the password to connect to the Network Camera.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAME1,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAME2, …,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NAME16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the name of the phone to use for Network Camera paging.
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBERx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBER1,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBER2, …,
NWCAMERA_PAGING_PHONE_NUMBER16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the phone number to use for Network Camera paging.
Value Range Max. 24 characters

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 297

5.3.36 Network Camera Settings

Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NAME1,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NAME2, …,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE5_NAME16
Value Format STRING
Description m=1–5, x=1–16
Specifies the phone name to use for Network Camera phone number
linkage.
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONEm_NUMBERx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NUMBER1,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE1_NUMBER2, …,
NWCAMERA_LINK_PHONE5_NUMBER16
Value Format STRING
Description m=1–5, x=1–16
Specifies the phone number to use for Network Camera phone
number linkage.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string

NWCAMERA_STREAMx
Parameter Name Example NWCAMERA_STREAM1, NWCAMERA_STREAM2, …,
NWCAMERA_STREAM16
Value Format INTEGER
Description x=1–16
Specifies the stream of the Network Camera image.
Value Range • 1: Stream1
• 2: Stream2
Default Value 1

NWCAMERA_ALARM_NOTIFICATION
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the mode for Network Camera alarm notifications.
Value Range • 0: Off
• 1: Pop-up
Default Value 0

298 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings

NWCAMERA_ALARM_DISARM_TIME
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the time, in seconds, for the alarm interval.
Value Range 2–10
Default Value 2

NWCAMERA_ALARM_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the local port number for Network Camera alarms.
Value Range 1024–65535
Default Value 1818

5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings

COMM_CAMERA_NUMBERx
Parameter Name Example COMM_CAMERA_NUMBER1, COMM_CAMERA_NUMBER2, …,
COMM_CAMERA_NUMBER16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the phone number of each Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 32 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Phone Number

COMM_CAMERA_NAMEx
Parameter Name Example COMM_CAMERA_NAME1, COMM_CAMERA_NAME2, …,
COMM_CAMERA_NAME16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the name of each Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 24 characters
Default Value Empty string
Web User Interface Reference Name

COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTINGx
Parameter Name Example COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTING1,
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTING2, …,
COMM_CAMERA_RINGTONE_SETTING16
Value Format INTEGER
Description x=1–16
Specifies the ringtone of each Communication Camera.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 299

5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings

Value Range 1–32 (10: doorbell)

Default Value 10
Web User Interface Reference Ringtone [ 1 - 32 ]

DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERA1, DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERA2, …,
DTMF_CONTROL_UP_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for tilting the camera up for each
Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value 2

DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERA1, DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERA2,
…, DTMF_CONTROL_DOWN_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for tilting the camera down for each
Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value 8

DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERA1, DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERA2,
…, DTMF_CONTROL_LEFT_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for panning the camera left for each
Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value 4

DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERA1,
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERA2, …,
DTMF_CONTROL_RIGHT_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for panning the camera right for each
Communication Camera.

300 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.37 Communication Camera Settings

Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)

Default Value 6

DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERA1, DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERA2,
…, DTMF_CONTROL_OPEN_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for opening the door near the camera for
each Communication Camera.
Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value 5

DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERA1,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERA2, …,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMUP_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for zooming in for each Communication
Camera.
Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value 9

DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERA1,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERA2, …,
DTMF_CONTROL_ZOOMDOWN_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for zooming out for each Communication
Camera.
Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)
Default Value 7

DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERAx
Parameter Name Example DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERA1,
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERA2, …,
DTMF_CONTROL_VOICE_CAMERA16
Value Format STRING
Description x=1–16
Specifies the DTMF value for talking with the camera for each
Communication Camera.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 301

5.3.38 Logging Settings

Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, #)

Default Value *

5.3.38 Logging Settings

SYSLOG_ADDR
Value Format STRING
Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of Syslog server.
Value Range Max. 256 characters
Default Value Empty string

SYSLOG_PORT
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the port of Syslog server.
Value Range 1–65535
Default Value 514

LOGGING_LEVEL_DNS
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of DNS.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 0

LOGGING_LEVEL_NW1
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of SNTP.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 0

LOGGING_LEVEL_FILE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of FILE downloading.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 6

LOGGING_LEVEL_SIP
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of SIP.
Value Range 0–6

302 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 5.3.38 Logging Settings

Default Value 0

LOGGING_LEVEL_TR069
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of TR-069.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 0

LOGGING_LEVEL_STUN
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of STUN.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 0

LOGGING_LEVEL_NW2
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of Xsi, XML, XMPP, LDAP.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 0

LOGGING_LEVEL_CFGPARSE
Value Format INTEGER
Description Specifies the log level of configuration parse.
Value Range 0–6
Default Value 0

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 303

5.3.38 Logging Settings

304 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 6
Useful Telephone Functions

This section explains phone number settings, dial plan

settings, the phonebook import/export function, the
Broadsoft XSI function, the BroadCloud (Presence)
function and Pairing (Parallel Mode).

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 305

6.1 Phonebook Import and Export

6.1 Phonebook Import and Export

This section explains how to import and export phonebook data. Phonebook data of the unit includes names
and phone numbers.
Phonebook data on the unit can be exported, edited with editor tools, and imported again. In addition,
phonebook data created with other software can be imported into the unit.
You can use the phonebook import and export functions as follows.
A. Phonebook data
B. Microsoft Excel
C. Microsoft Outlook

Editing Phonebook Data on a PC

The phonebook data stored on the unit can be edited using a program such as Microsoft Excel® spreadsheet
software. For details about the operation, see 6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel.
You can export the phonebook data to the PC, edit the exported file using appropriate software, and then
import it into the unit.
A B

A B

D C

Importing Address Book Data from a PC

You can import address book data stored in programs, such as Microsoft Outlook® messaging and
collaboration client, into the unit.
First, export address book data from the e-mail software to a program such as Microsoft Excel, edit it as
necessary, and then import the exported data into the unit.
For details about the operation, see 6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook.

A B C

C B A

Backing up Phonebook Data

You can export the phonebook data from the unit to a PC and keep the file as a backup in case of data loss
or for use when exchanging the unit.
A

Importing the Same Phonebook Data to other Units

You can export the phonebook data created on a unit to a PC, and then import it into other units.

306 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.1 Phonebook Import and Export

A B

You can also import phonebook data created on a PC to other units.

B A B

Import/Export File Format

The file format used for importing and exporting the phonebook data is "TSV". When importing or exporting
using Microsoft Excel, "CSV (Comma-separated Value)" is generally used as the file format.
A phonebook entry in the unit has 9 fields. An entry in the phonebook data is represented in text as "record
ID <TAB> name <TAB> reserved <TAB> phone number <TAB> phone number <TAB> phone number
<TAB> phone number <TAB> phone number <TAB> reserved <line break>".
The text data can be edited using any text editing software that supports UTF-16 encoding with a BOM and
little endian byte ordering. When you save the text file, it must be saved using the same format, or the text
might become garbled.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 307

6.1.1 Import/Export Operation

Phonebook Data in Text Format

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

1 Aaron MacDowel 501 1234001

2 Barbara Nicolls 502 1234002
3 Carl O’Brien 503 1234003
4 Dorothy Parker 1234004
···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ····
···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ···· ····

Record ID (Unique ID: 1–500)

Tab
Name (up to 24 characters)
Tab
Reserved (up to 24 characters)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Phone number (up to 32 digits)
Tab
Reserved

6.1.1 Import/Export Operation

The following procedures explain how to import phonebook data to units, and how to export phonebook data
from units to a PC through the Web user interface.
For details about the settings, see 4.6.6 Import Phonebook or 4.6.7 Export Phonebook.
To import phonebook data
1. Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Import Phonebook].
2. In [File Name], enter the full path to the file that you want to import, or click Browse to select the
phonebook data file that you want to import.
3. Click [Import].
To export the phonebook data
1. Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Export Phonebook].
2. Click [Export].
3. On the "Now Processing File Data" screen, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message, or wait until
File Download window appears.

308 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel

Note
• Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked. If the
file cannot be exported successfully, try the export operation again or change the security settings
of your Web browser.
4. Click Save on File Download window.
5. On the Save As window, select a folder to save the exported phonebook data to, enter the file name in
File name, select TSV File for Save as type, and click Save.
If the file is downloaded successfully, the Download complete window appears.
6. Click Close.
7. To exit the operation, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message.
The [Export Phonebook] screen returns.

Note
• Make sure that the import source or unit is in standby mode.
• The import source or unit must be specified at the time of import/export. The imported data is added
to the existing phonebook data.
– If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same record ID as an imported entry, the entry
is overwritten with the imported entry.
– If the existing phonebook data has an entry with no record ID, it will be left in the phonebook.
– If the imported phonebook data has an entry with no record ID, the imported entry is added as a
new entry unless an existing entry with the same name and phone number is found.
Phonebook entries that are added via the unit are not assigned record IDs. Therefore, it is
recommended to export phonebook data from the unit, assign record IDs manually and then re-import
them. Doing so can help manage phonebook data.
• The phonebook for a unit has the following limitations:
– A maximum of 500 phonebook entries can be stored in the unit. If the unit already has phonebook
data, it accepts up to the 500th entry, including the existing entries.
– The name can contain up to 24 characters.
– The phone number can contain up to 32 digits.
– Phonebook entries exceeding the characters or digits limits cannot be imported properly.
• If the export is interrupted by an operation on the unit, only the data that has been successfully
exported before the interruption is exported to a file.

6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel

You can edit exported phonebook data on a PC with software such as Microsoft Excel. You can then import
the phonebook data into units.
To open the phonebook data on a PC
1. Open Microsoft Excel.
2. Click Office Button, and then Open.
Note
• Make sure to open a TSV file in this procedure. If you change the extension of a TSV file to ".csv",
the file will open by simply double-clicking it. However, the character encoding of the file might not
be recognized properly, resulting in garbled characters, or the phone numbers might be
recognized as numbers, resulting in data alteration.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 309

6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel

3. Select All Files for the file type, select the exported phonebook data file, and click Open.

4. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3 window, click Next.

Note
• Regardless of what is selected for File origin, the file will be processed normally if the format is
appropriate.
5. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of 3 window, select Tab for Delimiters, and then click Next.

310 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook

6. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3 window, select all columns in Data preview, select Text in
Column data format, and then click Finish.
The TSV file will be opened.

Note
• Phone numbers must be treated as text strings. Otherwise, a "0" at the beginning of a phone
number might disappear when exported.
To save the phonebook data for importing to the unit
1. After editing the phonebook entries, click Office Button, and then Save As.
2. Enter a file name in File name, and select Unicode Text in Save as type.
The file will be saved in UTF-16 little endian with a BOM. Fields will be separated by tabs.
3. Click Save.
A message warning you about file compatibility will be displayed.
4. Click Yes.
The file will be saved as a Unicode text file, with the fields separated by tabs.

Note
• The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Excel. Therefore, files
exported and imported between the unit and Microsoft Excel are not always compatible with each
other.

6.1.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook

You can export address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook, and then edit the exported
data with a program such as Microsoft Excel in order to import it to the unit.
To export the Microsoft Outlook address book data
1. In Microsoft Outlook, click File, and then click Import and Export.
2. Select Export to a file, and click Next.
3. Select Tab Separated Values (Windows), and click Next.
4. Select Contacts, and click Next.
5. Click Browse, select a folder, and then enter the file name to export the data to.
6. Click OK.
7. On the Export to a File window, click Next.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 311

6.2 Dial Plan

8. Click Map Custom Fields.

9. Clear all items in the To list by clicking Clear Map. Then, drag only Last Name and Business Phone
from the From list to the To list, and click OK.
10. On the Export to a File window, click Finish.
The data will be exported.

Note
• You can export data from Microsoft Outlook Express by using a similar procedure. It is also possible
to export data from other applications that are compatible with Microsoft Excel.
• You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel, and then import it to the unit. For details, see
6.1.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel.
• First and middle names are not exported using this procedure. You can export all necessary items
and edit the entry before importing them to the unit.
• In the file exported from Microsoft Outlook, fields are separated by tabs and encoded using the
default character encoding for your operating system.

6.2 Dial Plan

The dial plan settings control how numbers dialed by the user are transmitted over the network. Dial plan
settings can be configured on a per-line basis. These settings can be programmed either through the Web
user interface (→ see 4.6.2.2 Dial Plan) or by configuration file programming (→ see 5.3.34 Call Control
Settings).

6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings

To set Dial Plan
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Call Control [Line 1]–[Line x]].
2. In [Dial Plan], enter the desired dial format.
The dial plan settings can be configured for each line separately.
For details about available characters for the dial format, see Available Values for the Dial Plan Field
in this section.
3. Select [Yes] or [No] for [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match].
• If you select [Yes], the call will be made even if the user dials a phone number that does not match
the dial format in [Dial Plan].
• If you select [No], the call will be made only if the user dials a phone number that matches the dial
format in [Dial Plan].

Note
• For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming, see "DIAL_PLAN_n"
and "DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n" in 5.3.34 Call Control Settings.

Available Values for the Dial Plan Field

The following table explains which characters you can use in the dial format, and what the characters mean.
Element Available Value Description
String 0–9, [, -, ], <, :, >, *, You can enter dial plan descriptions using a combination of the
#, !, S, s, T, t, X, x, ., characters listed as available values.
|, +

312 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings

Element Available Value Description

Digit 0–9, *, #, + Example: "123"
If the dialed phone number is "123", the call is made
immediately.
Wildcard X, x Example: "12xxxxx"
If the dialed phone number is "12" followed by any 5-digit
number, the call is made immediately.
Range [] Example: "[123]"
If the dialed phone number is either one of "1", "2", or "3", the
call is made immediately.
Subrange - Example: "[1-5]"
If the dialed phone number is "1", "2", "3", "4", or "5", the call is
made immediately.
• A subrange is only valid for single-digit numbers. For
example, "[4-9]" is valid, but "[12-21]" is invalid.
Repeat . Example: "1."
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by zero or more "1"s
(e.g., "11", "111"), the call is made.
Substitution <(before):(after)> Example: "<101:9999>"
If the dialed phone number is "101", "101" is replaced by "9999",
and then the call is made immediately.
Timer S, s (second) Example: "1x.S2"
If the dialed phone number begins with "1", the call is made after
a lapse of 2 seconds.
• The number (0–9) followed by "S" or "s" shows the duration in
seconds until the call is made.
Macro Timer T, t Example: "1x.T"
If the dialed phone number begins with "1", the call is made after
a lapse of "T" seconds.
• The value of "T" or "t" can be configured through the Web
user interface (→ see [Timer for Dial Plan] in 4.6.1.1 Call
Control).
Reject ! Example: "123xxx!"
If the dialed phone number is "123" followed by 3 digits, the call
is not made.
Alternation | Example: "1xxxx|2xxx"
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by 4 digits, or "2"
followed by 3 digits, the call is made immediately.
You can use this element to specify multiple numbers.
Comma , Example: "9,xxxxxxxxxxx.T"
If 9 is dialed, the second dial tone is heard, and then 11 digits
are dialed, the call is made after waiting "T" seconds. * The
dialing will include the initially dialed "9".

Note
• You can enter up to 1000 characters in [Dial Plan].

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 313

6.2.1 Dial Plan Settings

• You can assign up to 100 dial plans separated by "|" in [Dial Plan].
• You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan in [Dial Plan].
• You can assign up to 10 substitutions in [Dial Plan].
• After the user completes dialing, the unit immediately sends all the dialed digits if [Call Even If Dial
Plan Does Not Match] is set to [Yes] in the Web user interface or if
"DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_n" is set to "N" in a configuration file. The unit recognizes the
end of dialing as follows:
– The inter-digit timer expires (→ see [Inter-digit Timeout] in 4.6.1.1 Call Control in the Web user
interface or "INTDIGIT_TIM" in 5.3.30 Telephone Settings in the configuration file).
– The user presses [ENTER] or the # key.
– The call is initiated after going off-hook (pre-dial).

Dial Plan Example

The following example shows dial plans containing character sequences separated by "|".
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"

Complete Match:
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "211", "911" and so on, the call is made immediately.

Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "2123456789", "5987654321" and so on, the call is made immediately.
Partial Match (when the dial plan contains "."):
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "01254", "012556" and so on, the call is made after the inter-digit timer
expires.

Partial Match (when the dial plan does not contain "."):
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set
to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set
to [No], the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.

Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Not Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Not Match] is set to [No], the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.

No Match:
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]x.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is
set to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is
set to [No], the call is denied.

314 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.3 Flexible Keys

6.3 Flexible Keys

You can customize the flexible keys on the unit. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or
as feature buttons (function keys). These settings can be programmed either through the Web user interface
(→ see 4.6.4 Flexible Key Settings (No. 1–24) and 4.6.9 DSS Console) or by configuration file
programming (→ see 5.3.31 Flexible Key Settings and 5.3.32 DSS Key Settings).
The following types of flexible keys are available:
Button Description Lamp Indication
One Touch Dial Used to dial a previously set phone
-
number with one touch.
BLF (Busy Used to show the current status of Off: The BLF extension is idle.
Lamp Field) another extension, call the extension Red on: A corresponding BLF extension is
and transfer calls to it. using the line.
Flashing red rapidly: The BLF extension is
Note receiving an incoming call.
• It may be necessary to specify
the Resource List URI to use
this feature, depending on your
phone system (→ see
[Resource List URI] in
4.6.2.1 Call Features in the
Web user interface or
"RESOURCELIST_URI_n" in
5.3.34 Call Control Settings in
the configuration file).
• Specify the number assigned to
a BLF for performing call pickup
(→ see [Directed Call Pickup]
in 4.6.1.1 Call Control in the
Web user interface or
"NUM_PLAN_PICKUP_DIRECT"
in 5.3.30 Telephone Settings
in the configuration file).
Line Used to seize a line in order to make Off: The line is idle.
or receive a call. The LED of the Blue on: The line is on a call.
function key indicates the status of the Flashing blue slowly: A call is on hold.
line. Flashing blue rapidly: A call (including Hold
Recall) is being received to the line (or a
shared line).
Red on: A shared line is in use or a call is on
private hold at another unit.
Flashing blue slowly: A shared line is on
hold at another unit.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 315

6.3 Flexible Keys

Button Description Lamp Indication

ACD *1 Used to log in or log out of a group Off: Logged in
when ACD (Automatic Call Red on: Logged out
Distribution) is enabled.

Note
• It is necessary to set the ACD
feature to enable (→ see
[Enable ACD] in 4.3.10 ACD
Settings [Line1]–[Line16] in
the Web user interface or
"ACD_ENABLE_n" in 5.3.14 Call
Center Settings in the
configuration file).
Wrap Up *1 The Wrap Up button alternates the Off: Ready mode for incoming calls
setting of Wrap Up mode, Not Ready Red on: Unavailable
mode or Ready mode for incoming Flashing red slowly: Wrap Up
calls. In Wrap Up mode/Not Ready
mode for incoming calls, incoming
calls will not be received through the
ACD (Automatic Call Distribution)
group.

Note
• It is necessary to set the ACD
feature to enable (→ see
[Enable ACD] in 4.3.10 ACD
Settings [Line1]–[Line16] in
the Web user interface or
"ACD_ENABLE_n" in 5.3.14 Call
Center Settings in the
configuration file).
Line Status Used to confirm the status of each
line. This allows the function key to
-
work as a Line key such as seizing a
line in order to make or receive a call.
Call Forward Used to forward incoming calls to the
-
assigned extension in the key.
Phonebook Used to open the phonebook. -
Call History Used to open the incoming/outgoing
-
call log.

316 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.3 Flexible Keys

Button Description Lamp Indication

Simultaneous Enables parallel ringing. Up to 10 Off: Simultaneous Ring off
Ring *1 locations can be specified to ring Blue on: Simultaneous Ring on
simultaneously when you receive a
call.

Note
• It is necessary to set the XSI
feature to enable (→ see
[Enable Xtended Service] and
[Server Address] in
4.3.7 Xtended Service
Settings in the Web user
interface or "XSI_ENABLE" and
"XSI_SERVER" in 5.3.11 XSI
Settings in the configuration
file).
Hoteling Used to log in/log out of the Call
(Hospitality) *1 Center Hoteling Event.

Note
• It is necessary to set the
Hoteling (Hospitality) feature to
enable (→ see [Enable Call
Center] and [Hoteling Event] -
in 4.3.11 Call Center Settings
[Line1]–[Line16] in the Web
user interface or
"CALL_CENTER_ENABLE_n"
and "CC_HOTELING_EVENT_n"
in 5.3.14 Call Center Settings
in the configuration file).
Transfer Used to transfer a call to the assigned
extension in the key with confirmation, -
during a conversation.
Blind Transfer Used to transfer a call to the assigned
extension in the key without -
confirmation, during a conversation.
Conference Used to establish a multiple-party
-
conversation (conference).
Directed Call Used to answer an incoming call
Pickup arriving at the specified telephone -
number.
Call Park *1 Used to transfer a call to Call Parking. -
Call Park Used to retrieve a parked call (Call
-
Retrieve*1 Parking).

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 317

6.3.1 Settings using Web User Interface Programming

Button Description Lamp Indication

Network Used to connect to a Network
-
Camera Camera.

*1 This is an optional feature and may not be supported on your phone system.

6.3.1 Settings using Web User Interface Programming

To set Flexible Keys
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Flexible Key Settings].
2. Enter settings as described in the following table.
When it is necessary to set both parameter 1 and parameter 2, enter a comma between the values.
Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Button
Description Value Description Value
One Touch Dial Phone Number Up to 32 digits Line No. 1–16
BLF (Busy Lamp Phone Number Up to 32 digits Line No. 1–16
Field)*1
Line Line No. 1–16 - -
ACD Line No. 1–16 - -
Wrap Up Line No. 1–16 - -
Line Status - - - -
Call Forward Phone Number Up to 32 digits - -
Phonebook Classification • 0: Personal & Category 1–9
Shared
• 1: Personal
Phonebook
• 2: Shared
Phonebook
Call History Classification • 0: Call History
• 1: Missed Calls
• 2: Incoming - -
Calls
• 3: Outgoing
Calls
Simultaneous Ring Line No. 1–16 - -
Hoteling (Hospitality) - - - -
Transfer Phone Number Up to 32 digits - -
Blind Transfer Phone Number Up to 32 digits - -
Conference Phone Number Up to 32 digits - -
Directed Call Pickup Phone Number Up to 32 digits Line No. 1–16

318 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming

Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Button
Description Value Description Value
Call Park Call parking Up to 16 digits
- -
number*2
Call Park Retrieve Park retrieve Up to 16 digits Line No. 1–16
number*2
Network Camera Network Camera 1–16 - -
Number

*1 More than 48 BLF keys can be programmed, but LED status indication is available only up to 48 keys.
*2 Values may vary depending on your phone system dealer/service provider.

[Setting Example]
The following screen shows an example of setting flexible keys.

Description:
• Button 1 is set to log in and log out of an ACD group on line 6.
• Buttons 2 and 5 are set to show the status of a certain extension. They can also be used to call that
extension and transfer calls to it.*1
• Buttons 3 and 6 are set to make calls to a certain destination using the One-Touch Dialing feature.
• Button 4 is set to make calls to a certain destination using the Line feature.
• Button 7 is set to log in and log out of an ACD group on line 5.
*1 You can also assign extension numbers automatically to BLF buttons using the information in the server’s resource list without
having to input information here.

6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming

Flexible keys can be configured by configuration file programming using a combination of 3 parameters:

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 319

6.3.2 Settings using Configuration File Programming

• Parameter 1 refers to either "FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx" or "DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ACTx".

• Parameter 2 refers to either "FLEX_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx" or "DSS_BUTTON_FACILITY_ARGx".
• Parameter 3 refers to either "FLEX_BUTTON_LABELx" or "DSS_BUTTON_LABELx".
Details about parameters 1 and 2 are explained in the following table.

Note
• For parameter 2, value 1 and value 2 must be separated by a comma.
Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Value Value 1 Value 2 Note
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number Line Number (1– The total maximum number of
L_ ONETOUCH (Max. 32 16) characters is 35.
characters) Line 1 is set when value 2 is "1", "0",
or "None".
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number Line Number (1– The total maximum number of
L_ BLF (Max. 32 16) characters is 35.
characters) Line 1 is set when value 2 is "1", "0",
or "None".
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Line Number (1– The default line is set when value 1 is
-
L_ LINE 16) "0" or "None".
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Line Number (1– The default line is set when value 1 is
-
L_ ACD 16) "0" or "None".
X_PANASONIC_IPTE
- - -
L_ LINESTATUS
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number
L_ FORWARD (Max. 32 - -
characters)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE 1 (Personal Category Number The search by name screen is
L_ PHONEBOOK Phonebook) (1–9) displayed when value 2 is "0" or
"None".
2 (Shared
Phonebook)
- -
0 or None (Select
Phonebook)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE 1 (Missed Call)
L_ CALLLOG
2 (Incoming Call
Log)
3 (Outgoing Call - -
Log)
0 or None (Select
Logs)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Line Number (1–
- -
L_ PARARING 16)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE
- - -
L_ HOTELING

320 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.4 Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface)

Parameter 1 Parameter 2
Value Value 1 Value 2 Note
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number
L_ TRANSFER (Max. 32 - -
characters)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number
L_ BLINDTRANSFER (Max. 32 - -
characters)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number
L_ CONFERENCE (Max. 32 - -
characters)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Phone Number Line Number (1–
L_ DIRECTPICKUP (Max. 32 16) -
characters)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Call parking If value 1 is not set, the value of
L_ CALLPARK number (Max. 16 - "NUM_PLAN_PARKING" is used.
characters)
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Park retrieve Line Number (1– If value 1 is not set, the value of
L_ PARKRETRIEVE number (Max. 16 16) "NUM_PLAN_PARK_RETRIEVIN G" is
characters) used.
X_PANASONIC_IPTE Network Camera - -
L_ Number (1–16)
NETWORKCAMERA
X_PANASONIC_IPTE - - -
L _APPLICATION

6.4 Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface)

6.4.1 Outline
BroadWorksXsi is an API library used to support the integration of Internet service-based BroadWorks
functionality to create web applications and mashups (web application hybrids).
This product uses the Broadsoft XSI (Xtended Services Interface) to run the following services.
1. Remote Office
2. AnyWhere
3. Simultaneous Ring Personal
4. Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call)
5. Call Forward
6. Do Not Disturb
7. Anonymous Call Rejection

(1) Remote Office

The Remote Office function allows you to use your home phone or cellular phone as your office phone. All
incoming calls are forwarded from the IP phone to the Remote Office phone number.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 321

6.4.2 XSI Service Settings

(2) AnyWhere
The AnyWhere function is for remote users to easily access their IP phone's functions (such as making and
receiving calls, and voicemail) from any phone.

(3) Simultaneous Ring Personal

The Simultaneous Ring Personal function enables up to 10 other phone numbers to ring at the same time
an IP phone receives a call.

(4) Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call)

The Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking (Anonymous Call) function sets the caller information for calls made
from an IP phone to "Anonymous Call".

(5) Call Forward

The Call Forward function forwards incoming calls to an IP phone to a specified phone number.
* When Feature Key Synchronization is set (FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n="Y", see page 290), the
Call Forward function will not operate as an XSI function.

(6) Do Not Disturb

The Do Not Disturb function rejects incoming calls to the IP phone.
* When Feature Key Synchronization is set (FWD_DND_SYNCHRO_ENABLE_n="Y", see page 290), the
Do Not Disturb function will not operate as an XSI function.

(7) Anonymous Call Rejection

The Anonymous Call Rejection function rejects calls made to the IP phone as Anonymous Calls.

6.4.2 XSI Service Settings

Phone settings for using XSI services can be set using configuration parameters or the Web user interface
(administrators only).
See 4.3.7 Xtended Service Settings for making settings using the Web user interface.
The following parameter names will be displayed and can be set as needed.
Parameter Name Description Reference
XSI_ENABLE Enables XSI services. page 200
XSI_SERVER Specifies the XSI server. page 200
XSI_SERVER_TYPE Specifies the communication method. page 201
XSI_SERVER_PORT Specifies the port used for communication with page 201
the XSI server.
XSI_USERID_n Specifies the user name for each user page 201
(account) that will use XSI.
XSI_PASSWORD_n Specifies the password for each user (account) page 201
that will use XSI.
XSI_PHONEBOOK_ENABLE_n Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi page 201
phonebook service.
XSI_PHONEBOOK_CYCLIC_INTVL Specifies the interval, in minutes, between page 202
periodic checks for updates of the Xsi Directory
(Phonebook) files.

322 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 6.5 BroadCloud (Presence)

Parameter Name Description Reference

XSI_PHONEBOOK_RESYNC_DUR Specifies the time range, in minutes, during page 202
ATION which units will access the server at a random
time.
XSI_PHONEBOOK_TYPE_n Specifies the type of Xsi phonebook. page 202
XSI_CALLLOG_ENABLE_n Specifies whether to enable or disable the Xsi page 202
call log service.
XSI_VISUAL_VM_ENABLE_n Specifies whether to enable or disable the page 203
Visual Voice Mail feature of the selected line.
XSI_SIP_CREDENTIALS_ENABLE Specifies whether to enable or disable the XSI page 203
SIP Credentials feature.

Note
To change settings for the following XSI services using a unit, the parameter
ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE="Y" (see page 288) must be set. (When ADMIN_ABILITY_ENABLE="N" is
set, the settings can only be viewed.)
• Remote Office ("Remote Office")
• AnyWhere ("Anywhere")
• Simultaneous Ring Personal ("SimultaneousRing")
• Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking ("Anonymous Call")
• Anonymous Call Rejection ("Block Anonymous")

Note
The text in parentheses are shown on the unit display.

Operations for accessing the above XSI services

1. In standby mode, tap or to select "Advanced Settings".
2. Tap "Call Settings".
3. Tap or to select "Remote Office", "Anywhere", "SimultaneousRing", "Anonymous
Call", or "Block Anonymous".
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions on the Panasonic Web site (→ see Introduction).

6.5 BroadCloud (Presence)

6.5.1 Outline
This product supports the following BroadCloud functions.

(1) BroadCloud Buddies

View the information of your Buddies.

(2) BroadCloud Favorites

View the information of your Buddies that have been marked as Favorites.

(3) BroadCloud Presence

Shares presence statuses.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 323

6.5.2 BroadCloud (Presence) Function Settings

6.5.2 BroadCloud (Presence) Function Settings

Phone settings for using XMPP functions can be set using configuration parameters or the Web user
interface (administrators only).
See 4.3.8 UC Settings for making settings using the Web user interface.
The following parameter names will be displayed and can be set as needed.
Parameter Name Description Reference
UC_ENABLE Enables BroadCloud services. page 205
UC_USERID Specifies user IDs for the BroadCloud server. page 205
UC_PASSWORD Specifies passwords for the BroadCloud server. page 205
XMPP_SERVER Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the XMPP server. page 205
XMPP_PORT Specifies the communication port for XMPP. page 205
XMPP_TLS_VERIFY Specifies the TLS (Transport Layer Security) certification page 206
validation type for protocol communication.
XMPP_ROOT_CERT_ Specifies the path (URL) of the ROOT certificate for XMPP. page 206
PATH
XMPP_CLIENT_CERT Specifies the path (URL) of the Client certificate for XMPP. page 206
_PATH
XMPP_PKEY_PATH Specifies the path (URL) of the private key for XMPP. page 206

324 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 7
Firmware Update

This section explains how to update the firmware of the

unit.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 325

7.1 Firmware Server Setup

7.1 Firmware Server Setup

No special server is necessary for the firmware update. You can use an HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or TFTP
server as the firmware server by simply setting its URL.

Note
• It is recommended to select a time for updating in which the unit will not be used. (For details about
the timing of updating configuration files, see 2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files.)

7.2 Firmware Update Settings

Firmware updates are provided by the manufacturer when necessary.
The firmware update will be executed by setting the corresponding parameters using configuration file
programming (→ see 5.3.6 Firmware Update Settings) or Web user interface programming (→ see
4.7.2 Firmware Maintenance). The following shows the parameters and the setting procedures:

Firmware Update Enable/Disable

• In a configuration file, add the line, FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y".
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then select
[Yes] for [Enable Firmware Update].

Firmware Version Number

• In a configuration file, specify the new version number in "FIRM_VERSION".

Firmware Server URL

• In a configuration file, specify the URL in "FIRM_FILE_PATH".
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then enter
the URL in [Firmware File URL].

Configuration Parameter Example

By setting the parameters as shown in the following example, the unit will automatically download the
firmware file from the specified URL, "http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw", and perform the update
operation if the currently used firmware version is older than 01.050.

Example
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y"
FIRM_VERSION="01.050"
FIRM_FILE_PATH="http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw"

7.3 Executing Firmware Update

After configuring the firmware update settings in the configuration file, the firmware will be updated when the
configuration file is downloaded. The firmware update procedure is detailed below.

The firmware update process

Note
• Downgrading the firmware is not recommended. Operation cannot be guaranteed after performing
a downgrade.

326 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 7.3 Executing Firmware Update

Step 1
The unit downloads a configuration file from the
provisioning server. A
• For details about setting the timing of when B
configuration files are downloaded, see
2.2.4 Downloading Configuration Files. A B

Provisioning Server Address

Configuration File
A. SIP Phone
B. Provisioning Server
Step 2
A
The unit compares the version number of the
firmware in the configuration file to the unit’s
current firmware version.
(In this example, the unit is using version 01.000
and the configuration file specifies version
01.050.) A B

Compare
A. SIP Phone
Current Version 01.000
B. Provisioned Configuration File
FIRM_VERSION="01.050"

Step 3
When a newer firmware version is specified in the
configuration file, the unit will download the A
firmware from the address specified under B
"FIRM_FILE_PATH" in the configuration file.
A B

http://firm.example.com/firm/01.050.fw
01.050.fw
A. SIP Phone
B. Firmware Server
Step 4
Once the newer firmware is downloaded, it is
applied to the unit and the unit automatically
restarts.

A
Version 01.050 Updated

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 327

7.3 Executing Firmware Update

328 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Section 8
Troubleshooting

This section provides information about troubleshooting.

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 329

8.1 Troubleshooting

8.1 Troubleshooting
If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section, disconnect the unit from the AC
outlet, then connect the AC adaptor again. If using PoE, disconnect the LAN cable, then connect the LAN
cable again.

General Use
Problem Cause/Solution
The display is blank. The unit is not designed to function when there is a power
failure. Make sure that the device supplying PoE is receiving
power and that the Ethernet cable is properly connected.
（If you are using a PoE hub, the number of devices that you
can connect simultaneously is limited by the amount of
power supplied by the hub.）
If an AC adaptor is connected, confirm that the AC adaptor is
connected and receiving power.
I cannot hear a dial tone. • Network settings may not be correct.
• Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all
the equipment. First, shut down your modem, router, hub,
unit, and PC. Then turn the devices back on, one at a
time, in this order: modem, router, hub, unit, PC.
• If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC,
check to see if your phone system is having connection
issues in your area.
• Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (→ see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
• Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
• Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router.
• For details about the settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.

330 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 8.1 Troubleshooting

Making/Answering Calls, Intercom

Problem Cause/Solution
The unit does not ring. • Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (→ see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
• Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
• Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router.
• Check [Call Control] for each line in the [Telephone] tab
in the Web user interface.
– If [Enable Do Not Disturb] is set to [Yes], the unit does
not receive calls (→ see 4.6.2.1 Call Features).
– If [Enable Call Forwarding No Answer] is set to [Yes],
the unit does not receive calls (→ see 4.6.2.1 Call
Features).
– If [Enable Block Anonymous Call] is set to [Yes], the
unit does not receive anonymous calls (→ see
4.6.2.1 Call Features).
• Check that [Enable Do Not Disturb], [Enable Call
Forwarding No Answer], and [Enable Block
Anonymous Call] are not controlled by your phone
system.
• For details about settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.
I cannot make a call. • Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (→ see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
• Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
• Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router.
• For details about settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.

Password for Web User Interface Programming

Problem Cause/Solution
I have lost the login password of the Web • Consult your network administrator or phone system
user interface for the Administrator or dealer.
User account. For security reasons, it is recommended that the
passwords are set again immediately (→ see 4.4.3 Admin
Password Settings or 4.4.2 User Password Settings).

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 331

Note

Time
Problem Cause/Solution
The time is not correct. • In the Web user interface, you can set NTP
synchronization and DST (Summer Time) control to adjust
the time automatically (→ see 4.4.4 Time Adjust
Settings).
• If the time is still incorrect even after setting NTP
synchronization, check the firewall and port forwarding
settings on the router.

Error Codes
During operation, error messages might appear on the unit. The following table lists these messages and
possible causes and solutions.
Error code Probable Cause Solution
Error:001 LAN disconnection Check the LAN cables connections.
detected
Error:002 Overlapping IP addresses Check the IP addresses and re-set them.
For making settings using a unit, see 1.1.3 Basic Network
Setup.
Error:003 The REGISTER of the Consult your network administrator or phone system
SIP server has not been dealer.
registered.

Error Message
Error Message Probable Cause Solution
Need Repair Hardware failure Consult your network administrator or phone system
dealer.

Checking the Status of the Unit

You can check the status of the unit by using Web user interface programming (→ see 4.2.2 Network
Status and 4.2.3 VoIP Status) or by looking at system logs (see 5.3.38 Logging Settings) sent from the
unit.

To check the setting status in the Web user interface

1. Click the [Status] tab, and then click [Network Status] to check the network settings.
2. Check the status displayed.
3. Click [VoIP Status] to check the VoIP settings.
4. Check the status displayed.
To check the setting status using the Unit
1. In standby mode, tap or to select "System Settings".
2. Tap "Status".

Export Logging File

Export the log file using the Web user interface (see 4.7.3 Export Logging File).

332 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Note

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 333

Note

334 Administrator Guide Document Version 2016-05

 Note

Document Version 2016-05 Administrator Guide 335

Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for
internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd.

© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2016

PNQX7726YA PD0616SM1086